Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Development
Thickening Facility
West Boise
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Phosphorus Removal Project
Volume 3 - Specifications: Divisions 26-44
Prepared for
City of Boise
April 2013
Prepared by
Boise, Idaho
WBG061110203237BOI
****
****
CH2M HILL
Boise, Idaho
April 2013
CH2M HILL 2013. All rights reserved.
Any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein is at the sole risk of
the party(ies) reusing, modifying, or altering it. All references to CH2M HILL and its employees and all professional seals
shall be removed prior to any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document.
Copy No.
VOLUME 3
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 26 - 44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pages
VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 THROUGH DIVISION 1
PART 1PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00 11 13
00 21 13
00 41 13
00 43 13
Invitation to Bid ............................................................ ............. 1Instructions to Bidders ............................................................... 1Supplement: Escrow Bid Document Certificate. ........................ 1Bid Form (Stipulated Price Basis) ............... .............................. 1Bid Bond ................................................................................... . 1-
2
16
1
7
3
PROJECT FORMS
00 61 13.13
00 61 13.13
00 61 13.16
PART 3SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00
01 20 00
01 26 00
01 29 00
Summary of Work ....................................................................... 1Disputes Review Board............................................................... 1Supplement: Appendix A Disputes Review Board Three Party
Agreement ................................................................................... 1Contract Modification Procedures .............................................. 1Payment Procedures .................................................................... 1-
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1
7
7
7
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - i
01 31 13
01 31 19
01 32 00
01 33 00
01 42 13
01 43 33
01 45 16.13
01 45 33
01 50 00
01 55 00
01 57 13
01 61 00
01 73 19
01 77 00
01 78 23
01 88 15
01 91 14
Supplement: Schedule of Values ................................................ 1Project Coordination ................................................................... 1Supplement: Removal from Service Request (RFS) Form ......... 1Project Meetings ......................................................................... 1Construction Progress Documentation ....................................... 1Submittal Procedures .................................................................. 1Supplement: Transmittal of Contractors Submittal ................... 1Abbreviations and Acronyms...................................................... 1Manufacturers Field Services .................................................... 1Supplement: Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance ............ 1Supplement: Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation .. 1Contractor Quality Control ......................................................... 1Special Inspection and Testing ................................................... 1Supplement: Contractors Statement of Responsibility .............. 1Supplement: Seismic Qualification of Mechanical and
Electrical Equipment Certificate of Compliance ........................ 1Temporary Facilities and Controls .............................................. 1Site Security ................................................................................ 1Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control ................................ 1Common Product Requirements ................................................. 1Installation of Rotary Screen Thickener Equipment (RST) ....... 1Closeout Procedures.................................................................... 1Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................ 1Supplement: Maintenance Summary Form................................. 1Seismic Anchorage and Bracing ................................................. 1Equipment Testing and Facility Startup...................................... 1Supplement: Unit Process Startup Form ..................................... 1Supplement: Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification 1-
4
12
1
3
8
12
1
5
4
1
1
9
6
2
2
9
2
9
8
9
5
7
2
5
6
1
1
Demolition ..................................................................................... 1- 7
DIVISION 03CONCRETE
03 01 32
03 01 33
03 10 00
03 15 00
03 21 00
03 24 00
Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces .................. 1Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces ..................................... 1Concrete Forming and Accessories............................................. 1Concrete Joints and Accessories ................................................. 1Reinforcing Steel ........................................................................ 1Fibrous Reinforcing .................................................................... 1-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - ii
16
14
5
8
5
3
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
03 39 00
03 62 00
03 63 00
03 64 23
Cast-in-Place Concrete................................................................ 1Supplement: Primary Structural Concrete Mix Design .............. 1Supplement: Slurry Concrete Mix Design .................................. 1Supplement: Encasement Concrete Mix Design......................... 1Supplement: Basin Concrete Fill Mix Design ............................ 1Supplement: Secondary Structural Concrete Mix Design .......... 1Concrete Curing .......................................................................... 1Nonshrink Grouting .................................................................... 1Supplement: 24-Hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout
Test Form .................................................................................... 1Supplement: Grout Testing Procedure Form .............................. 1Concrete Doweling ..................................................................... 1Crack Repair Epoxy Injection Grouting ..................................... 1-
29
3
2
2
2
2
4
7
1
2
5
9
Welding ....................................................................................... 1Supplement: Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table .......... 1Structural Steel Framing ............................................................. 1Steel Decking .............................................................................. 1Metal Fabrications ...................................................................... 1Metal Railings ............................................................................. 1Metal Gratings ............................................................................ 1-
5
1
13
6
25
12
6
Fluid-Applied Waterproofing ..................................................... 1Thermal Insulation ...................................................................... 1Roof Panels ................................................................................. 1Insulated Wall Panels .................................................................. 1Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ................................................... 1Firestopping ................................................................................ 1Joint Sealants .............................................................................. 1-
5
4
6
5
6
5
6
DIVISION 08OPENINGS
08 11 00
08 33 23
08 41 13
08 45 00
Metal Doors and Frames ............................................................. 1Overhead Coiling Doors ............................................................. 1Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts ............................ 1Translucent Wall Assemblies ..................................................... 1-
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4
5
6
11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - iii
Door Hardware............................................................................ 1- 10
Louvers........................................................................................ 1- 4
DIVISION 09FINISHES
09 06 00
09 22 16
09 29 01
09 30 00
09 90 00
Schedules for Finishes ................................................................ 1Nonstructural Metal Framing ...................................................... 1Gypsum Board ............................................................................ 1Tiling ........................................................................................... 1Painting and Coating ................................................................... 1Supplement: Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) ........................... 1Supplement: Product Data Sheet (PDS) .................................... .1-
2
4
3
5
27
1
1
DIVISION 10SPECIALITIES
10 14 00
10 28 00
10 44 00
Signage ........................................................................................ 1Supplement: Sign Schedule ........................................................ 1Toilet and Bath Accessories ........................................................ 1Portable Fire and Safety Equipment ........................................... 1-
5
1
3
4
DIVISION 11EQUIPMENT
11 24 19
DIVISION 12
12 35 53.13
Plumbing Piping Insulation......................................................... 1Plumbing Piping and Accessories ............................................... 1Plumbing Equipment .................................................................. 1Plumbing Fixtures ....................................................................... 1-
7
20
4
7
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC ............................ 1HVAC Insulation ........................................................................ 1HVAC Controls Field Components and Instruments ................. 1Refrigerant Piping ....................................................................... 1-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - iv
7
6
4
7
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Metal Ducts and Accessories ...................................................... 1Foul Air Ductwork and Accessories ........................................... 1HVAC Fans ................................................................................. 1Air Outlets and Inlets .................................................................. 1Air Handling Units ...................................................................... 1Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment ......................................... 1Terminal Heating and Cooling Units .......................................... 1-
28
13
12
4
26
15
9
Basic Electrical Requirements .................................................... 1Basic Electrical Materials and Methods...................................... 1Conductors .................................................................................. 1Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.......................... 1Raceway and Boxes .................................................................... 1Commissioning of Electrical Systems ........................................ 1Oil-Filled Pad Mounted Transformers ........................................ 1Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors ............................................ 1Low-Voltage Transformers ......................................................... 1Panelboards ................................................................................. 1Low-Voltage Motor Control ....................................................... 1Variable Frequency Drive Motor Control Centers...................... 1Wiring Devices ........................................................................... 1Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drive System ........................ 1Diesel Engine Generator Set ....................................................... 1Automatic Transfer Switches ...................................................... 1Transient Voltage Suppression ................................................... 1Low-Voltage Harmonic Correction Equipment .......................... 1Lighting ....................................................................................... 1-
7
11
20
6
31
20
7
12
3
7
12
9
8
10
15
5
4
9
9
DIVISION 31EARTHWORK
31 10 00
31 23 13
Site Clearing................................................................................ 1- 3
Subgrade Preparation .................................................................. 1- 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - v
Excavation................................................................................... 1Dewatering .................................................................................. 1Fill and Backfill .......................................................................... 1Trench Backfill ........................................................................... 1Geotextile .................................................................................... 1-
3
2
7
10
5
Aggregate Base Courses ............................................................. 1Asphalt Paving ............................................................................ 1Curbs and Gutters ....................................................................... 1Soil Preparation ........................................................................... 1Turf and Grasses ......................................................................... 1-
6
9
5
4
6
DIVISION 33UTILITIES
33 05 01.01
33 05 13
33 46 16
33 66 16
Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 1Manholes ..................................................................................... 1Underdrain System ...................................................................... 1Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls .............................. 1-
10
11
4
7
40 05 33
40 27 00
40 27 00.01
40 27 00.02
40 27 00.03
40 27 00.04
Piping Support Systems .............................................................. 1Supplement: Table 1 Nonchemical Areas ................................... 1Supplement: Table 2 Chemical Areas......................................... 1Pipe Heat Tracing........................................................................ 1Process PipingGeneral ............................................................ 1Supplement: Piping Schedule Legend ........................................ 1Supplement: Piping Schedule ..................................................... 1Cement-Mortar, Glass-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
(Data Sheet) ................................................................................ 1Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings (Data Sheet) ............................. 1Carbon Steel Pipe and Fitting - General Service (Data Sheet) ... 1Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings Natural Gas Service
(Data Sheet) ................................................................................ 1-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - vi
11
1
1
5
24
2
5
3
1
5
2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
40 42 13
40 80 01
40 90 00
40 91 00
40 99 90
Galvanized Steel Pipe and Malleable Iron Fittings ..................... 1Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings General Svc (Data Sheet)........ 1Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings (Data Sheet).......... 1Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
(Data Sheet) ................................................................................ 1Profile Wall Polyethylene (PWPE) Data Sheet .......................... 1Process Piping Specialties........................................................... 1Process Valves and Operators ..................................................... 1Supplement: Electric Motor Actuator Schedule ......................... 1Supplement: Self-Regulated Valve Schedule. ............................ 1Process Piping Insulation ............................................................ 1Supplement: Service and Insulation Thickness Table ................ 1Process Piping Leakage Testing.................................................. 1Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems ...................... 1Supplement: Process Control Narratives .................................... 1Supplement: Instrument List ....................................................... 1Supplement: PLC Equipment List .............................................. 1Supplement: Control Panel Schedule.......................................... 1Supplement: HDW-LCP-001 I/O List1- ..................................... 1Supplement: AER-LCP-002 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: AER-LCP-004 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: SCL-LCP-001 I/O List ........................................... 1Supplement: DFT-LCP-001 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: THK-LCP-001 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: Loop Status Report ................................................ 1Supplement: Instrument Calibration Sheet ................................. 1Supplement: I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet ................................ 1Supplement: Performance Acceptance Test Sheet...................... 1Instrumentation and Control Components .................................. 1Package Control Systems ............................................................ 1-
2
4
2
1
2
19
34
4
1
7
2
5
35
14
13
3
3
1
5
3
3
1
9
1
1
1
1
28
16
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - vii
Primary Clarifier Equipment ....................................................... 1Screw Centrifugal Submersible Pumps ...................................... 1Supplement: Pump and Motor Data Sheets ................................ 144 42 56.03
Vertical Turbine Solids Handling Pumps ................................... 1Supplement: Vertical Turbine Pump Data Sheets ...................... 144 42 56.05
Horizontal Chopper Pump and Mixing Assemblies ................... 144 42 56.06
Immersible Pumps ...................................................................... 1Supplement: Pump and Motor Data Sheets ................................ 144 42 56.09
Non-Clog Dry-Pit Centrifugal Pumps......................................... 1Supplement: Pump Data Sheet.................................................... 144 42 56.13
Progressing Cavity Pumps .......................................................... 1Supplement: Polymer Feed Pump Data Sheet ............................ 144 42 56.14
Lobe Pumps ................................................................................ 1Supplement: Thickened Sludge Pumps 1, 2 Data Sheet ............. 1Supplement: Thickened Sludge Pumps 3, 4 Data Sheet ............. 1Supplement: Fermented Primary Sludge Pumps 1, 2
Data Sheet ................................................................................... 144 42 56.18
Peristaltic Chemical Metering Pumps ......................................... 1Supplement: Pump Data Sheet.................................................... 144 42 56.19
Axial-Flow Pump ........................................................................ 144 42 56.19.01 Supplement: Axial-Flow Pump .................................................. 144 42 73.01
Thermoplastic Liner for Concrete Structures .............................. 144 44 63.03
Dry and Liquid Polymer Feed System ........................................ 1-
16
7
3
8
8
10
6
3
8
4
6
3
9
2
2
2
7
1
8
1
5
16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - viii
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 05 02
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable
to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.06
B.
C.
Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and
Group of hazardous area indicated.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
The following areas are classified hazardous Class I, Division 1, Group D, due
to the potential for occurrence of hazardous concentrations of combustible
gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials and methods
required for such areas.
1.
2.
B.
Fermentation Tanks:
a.
Internal area within fermentation tanks.
b.
Area within 3 foot radius of fermentation tank vent opening
Thickened Sludge Wet Well:
a.
Area within thickened sludge wet well.
Area within 3 foot radius of thickened sludge wet well vent
b.
opening.
3.
4.
Enclosed, below grade valve and metering vaults with closed piping
systems containing wastewater.
Primary Clarifier:
a.
Area between the top of the primary clarifier walls to the water
surface.
b.
Envelope extending 18 inches above the primary clarifier walls
and 18 inches out from the primary clarifier walls.
c.
Envelope 18 inches above grade extending out 10 feet from the
exterior of the primary clarifier walls.
Thickened Sludge Wet Well:
a.
Envelope within 3 feet of hatch opening.
b.
Envelope between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent opening.
Fermentation Tanks:
a.
Envelope within 3 feet of hatch opening.
Envelope between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent opening.
b.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
C.
The following areas are wet, and corrosive. Use materials and methods
required for such areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
The following areas are classified nonhazardous and wet. Use materials and
methods required for such areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
2.
3.
4.
Thickening Building:
a.
Electrical Room.
b.
Mechanical Platform.
c.
Stairwell.
d.
Entry.
e.
Restroom.
Galleries:
a.
West Gallery North Stairtower Eletrical Room.
b.
West Gallery South Stairtower Electrical Room.
c.
South Plant Division Structure Electrical Room.
d.
Pretreatment Building Electrical Room.
e.
RAS Pump Station Electrical Room.
Filtrate Facility Electrical Room.
DAFT Building Electrical Room.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
The following areas are not classified. Use dust-tight and oil-tight NEMA 12
materials and methods.
1.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are
required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of
materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.
B.
C.
D.
EQUIPMENT FINISH
A.
2.03
NAMEPLATES
A.
B.
C.
D.
Letter Height:
1.
2.
2.04
Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Lay out Work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member
or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform
cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings,
paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of
conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such
Work, restore surfaces to original condition.
3.03
Drawings provide a circuit schedule for each circuit showing the conduit and
cables to be included in each circuit. Do not combine power or control circuits
into common raceways without authorization of Engineer. When a cable tray
is provided the circuit may be collected into the common cable tray. Analog
cables shall be routed in a separate cable tray to avoid signal interference.
Power and control cables may be routed together in the same cable tray
separate from the analog circuits.
B.
Circuits shown on the facility plans can be combined into common raceways
in accordance with the requirements of the National Electric Code.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs: Field mark motor control centers, and
panelboards, and automatic transfer switches to warn qualified persons of
potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons
before working on energized equipment.
B.
C.
Equipment Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.05
3.06
LOAD BALANCE
A.
B.
C.
Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and
equipment by removing debris and vacuuming.
B.
Touchup Paint:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.07
Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects
of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 05 04
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW
VOLTAGE
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Operating Mechanism:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Trip Mechanism:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
J.
2.02
2.03
NEMA KS 1.
B.
C.
Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.
D.
E.
B.
C.
Class: RK-1.
Type: Dual element, with time delay.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts).
b.
Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts).
Cable Limiters:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
Ferrule:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.04
B.
C.
D.
Pushbutton Color:
1.
2.
ON or START: Black.
OFF or STOP: Red.
E.
F.
Legend Plate:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Material: Aluminum.
Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color.
Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces
on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function.
Letter Height: 7/64-inch.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
B.
C.
D.
Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing
direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.
E.
Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity
metal.
F.
G.
H.
Terminals:
1.
2.
3.
I.
J.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.06
Phoenix Contact
Ideal.
Electrovert USA Corp.
B.
C.
Accessories:
1.
2.
D.
Push-to-Test button.
Relay status LED.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
2.07
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.08
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type TR
Square D Co.; Type F.
General Electric Co.
Square D; Class 8903,
B.
PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-mil
polyvinyl chloride coating.
C.
Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless
steel, 12-gauge minimum.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.09
B.
Rating: Power source shall be rated 24 volts dc, nominal, with not more than
250 volts available under fault conditions.
C.
D.
E.
2.10
2.11
SWITCHBOARD MATTING
A.
B.
FIRESTOPS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.12
ENCLOSURES
A.
Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted
using an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as
bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3
3.01
Environment
Indoor
Finished
Dry
Indoor
Unfinished
Dry
Indoor
Unfinished
Industrial Use
12
Indoor
Any
Wet
Outdoor
Any
Wet
4X 304 Stainless
Steel
Any
Wet or Corrosive
4X Type 304
Stainless Steel
Any
Hazardous Gas
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
3.02
Finish
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.03
B.
Channel Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.04
3.05
3.06
B.
Arrange conductors such that wiring from hazardous areas cannot short to
wiring from nonhazardous area.
C.
SWITCHBOARD MATTING
A.
B.
Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operator
controls or afford access to devices.
FIRESTOPS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 05 05
CONDUCTORS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 1
e.
6.
7.
8.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 2
Product Data:
a.
Wire and cable.
b.
Wire and cable accessories.
c.
Cable fault detection system.
Manufactured Wire Systems:
a.
Product data.
b.
Rating information.
c.
Dimensional Drawings.
d.
Special fittings.
Cable Pulling Calculations:
a.
Ensure submitted and reviewed before cable installation.
b.
Provide for the following cable installations:
1)
Medium voltage cable runs that cannot be hand pulled.
2)
Feeder circuits; single conductors #4/0 and larger.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.
B.
PART 2
2.01
Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the
AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the
AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.
Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.
Terminations and Splices for Conductors above 600 Volts: Work shall be
done by journeyman lineman with splicing credentials or electrician certified
to use materials approved for cable splices and terminations.
PRODUCTS
B.
Conductor Type:
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 3
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.02
General:
1.
2.
3.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
B.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Conductors:
a.
14 AWG, seven-strand copper.
b.
Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon.
c.
UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-1.
d.
Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape.
e.
Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1,
Table 2.
Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.
Cable Sizes:
No. of Conductors
Jacket Thickness
(Mils)
0.41
45
0.48
45
0.52
45
12
0.72
60
19
0.83
60
25
1.00
60
1.15
80
37
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Southwire.
2.
General:
a.
Meet or exceed UL 1581 for cable tray use.
b.
Meet or exceed UL 1277 for direct burial and sunlight-resistance.
c.
Overall Jacket: PVC.
Conductors:
a.
Class B stranded, coated copper.
b.
Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene-propylene or crosslinked polyethylene.
c.
UL rated VW-1 or listed Type XHHW-2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 5
d.
3.
4.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 6
Color Code:
1)
Conductors, size 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors,
ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 1.
2)
Conductors, size 6 AWG and larger, ICEA S-73-532,
Method 4.
Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.
Cable Sizes:
No. of
Current
Carrying
Conductors
Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
Nominal
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
Conductor
Size
Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
14
14
2
3
4
0.42
0.45
0.49
45
12
12
2
3
4
0.42
0.45
0.49
45
10
10
2
3
4
0.54
0.58
0.63
60
10
3
4
0.66
0.75
60
3
4
0.74
0.88
60
3
4
0.88
1.04
60
80
3
4
1.01
1.16
80
3
4
1.10
1.25
80
1/0
3
4
1.22
1.35
80
2/0
3
4
1.32
1.53
80
3/0
3
4
1.40
1.60
80
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
D.
4/0
No. of
Current
Carrying
Conductors
Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
Nominal
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
3
4
1.56
1.78
80
110
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Southwire.
5.
E.
Conductor
Size
Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in
accordance with ASTM B8.
b.
Tinned copper drain wires.
c.
Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18.
d.
Insulation: 15-mil PVC.
e.
Jacket: 4-mil nylon.
f.
Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red with red conductor
numerically printed for group identification.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 7
g.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Number of Pairs
Maximum Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
Nominal Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
0.50
45
0.68
60
12
0.82
60
16
0.95
80
24
1.16
80
36
1.33
80
50
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Belden.
1.56
80
3.
4.
5.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
7.
Cable Sizes:
Conductor
Size
Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
(AWG)
No. of
Insulated
Conductors
Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
12 AWG
12 or 3x16
3
4
0.79
0.85
50
10 AWG
10 or 3x14
3
4
0.82
0.90
50
8 AWG
10 or 3x14
3
4
0.85
1.00
50
6 AWG
8 or 3x12
3
4
0.99
1.10
50
4 AWG
8 or 3x12
3
4
1.08
1.20
50
2 AWG
6 or 3x10
3
4
1.24
1.45
50
1 AWG
6 or 3x10
3
4
1.40
1.55
50
1/0 KCM
6 or 3x10
3
4
1.52
1.60
50
2/0 AWG
4 or 3x8
3
4
1.67
1.75
50
4/0 AWG
4 or 3x8
3
4
1.93
2.10
60
250 KCM
4 or 3x8
3
4
2.11
2.20
60
350 KCM
3 or 3x8
3
4
2.39
2.50
60
500 KCM
2 or 3x8
3
4
2.80
2.90
75
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 9
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.03
Conductors:
a.
Class B, stranded coated copper.
b.
Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL
Type XHHW-2.
c.
Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper.
Sheath:
a.
UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C.
b.
Continuous shield, A1/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper
braid.
Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569.
Cable Sizes:
Conductor
Size
Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
(AWG)
No. of
Insulated
Conductors
Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
Minimum
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
12 AWG
12
0.655
50
10 AWG
10
0.769
50
8 AWG
0.940
50
6 AWG
1.038
50
4 AWG
1.180
50
1.351
50
2 AWG
2
4
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Alpha Wire; Series V.
b.
Belden; Series 29500.
c.
LAPP USA; OLFLEX VFD Slim.
SPECIAL CABLES
A.
Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V:
1.
2.
3.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 10
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.04
2.05
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
B.
Tape:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Identification Devices:
1.
Sleeve:
a.
Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed
black markings.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 11
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.
3.
4.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 12
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
D.
Cable Lugs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
2.06
Cable Ties:
1.
2.
F.
Manufacturers:
1)
3M Co.
2)
Thomas & Betts.
3)
Marrette.
There are 2 types of interface systems within the treatment plant (Large and
Small). Provide accessories that match existing interfaces of existing
transformers. The existing transformers that are part of the construction both
use the large interface accessories.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 13
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.07
PULLING COMPOUND
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.08
Ideal Co.
Polywater, Inc.
Cable Grip Co.
WARNING TAPE
A.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 14
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.09
Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.
B.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-tocenter spacing as required by equipment terminals.
G.
H.
Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling
wires or cables.
I.
J.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 15
4.
5.
3.02
Separate control cables from power cables in same cable tray with
barriers.
Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the
following maximum intervals:
a.
Horizontal Runs: 20 feet.
b.
Vertical Runs: 5 feet.
2.
3.
6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each
end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping
turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.
8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
Colors:
System
Conductor
Color
Equipment
Grounding
Green
240/120 Volts,
Single-Phase, ThreeWire
Grounded Neutral
One Hot Leg
Other Hot Leg
White
Black
Red
208Y/120 Volts,
Three-Phase, FourWire
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
White
Black
Red
Blue
480Y/277 Volts,
Three-Phase, FourWire
Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
White
Brown
Orange
Yellow
All Systems
4.
B.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 16
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.03
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
C.
Method:
1.
2.
3.
3.04
Colors:
a.
Grounded Neutral: White.
b.
Phase A: Brown.
c.
Phase B: Orange.
d.
Phase C: Yellow.
B.
C.
Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on
stranded conductors.
Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for
instrumentation and control, circuit conductors.
Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection
of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 17
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 18
Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and
instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated,
locking-fork compression lugs.
Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in
accordance with terminal manufacturers instructions.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
I.
3.05
B.
Make joints and terminations with splice and termination kits, in accordance
with kit manufacturers instructions.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 19
2.
J.
3.06
B.
C.
D.
CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 20
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
GROUND ROD
A.
Material: Copper-clad.
B.
C.
Length: 8 feet.
GROUND CONDUCTORS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
CONNECTORS
A.
B.
Compression Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.
1.
2.04
Manufacturers:
a.
Burndy Corp.
b.
Thomas and Betts Co.
GROUNDING WELLS
A.
Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover marked
GROUND ROD.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.02
WIRE CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
H.
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
MOTOR GROUNDING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
GROUND RODS
A.
B.
Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.
C.
GROUNDING WELLS
A.
B.
C.
CONNECTIONS
A.
General:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
B.
C.
3.
2.
3.
3.08
Mechanical Type:
1.
3.07
Compression Type:
1.
2.
D.
B.
C.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.09
3.10
C.
D.
TRANSFORMER GROUNDING
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
7.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Manufacturers Literature:
a.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b.
Intermediate metal conduit.
c.
PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
d.
PVC tubing (Type EB) conduit.
e.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit, submittal to include
copy of manufacturers warranty.
f.
Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
g.
Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit.
h.
Flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit.
i.
Device boxes for use in hazardous areas.
j.
Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade.
k.
Large junction and pull boxes.
l.
Terminal junction boxes.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.
B.
PART 2
2.01
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
3.
4.
F.
G.
Meet requirements of UL 1.
Material: Galvanized steel.
3.
2.02
H.
FITTINGS
A.
2.
General:
a.
Meet requirements of UL 514B.
b.
Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless
compression fittings not permitted.
Bushing:
a.
Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for
150 degrees C.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Series BU-I.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Type HB.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Grounding Bushing:
a.
Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for
150 degrees C, with solderless lugs.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Series GIB.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG.
Conduit Hub:
a.
Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw.
b.
UL listed for use in wet locations.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton, Series HUB-B.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Series CH.
3)
Meyers; ST Series.
Conduit Bodies:
a.
Sized as required by NFPA 70.
b.
Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions):
1)
Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or Form 8 threaded condulets.
3)
Killark; Series O electrolets.
4)
Thomas & Betts; Form 7 or Form 8.
c.
Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations):
1)
Appleton.
2)
Crouse-Hinds.
3)
Killark.
Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
Unions:
a.
Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Series SCC bolt-on coupling or Series EC threepiece union.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series,
three-piece coupling.
Conduit Sealing Fitting:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS.
3)
Killark; Type EY or Type EYS.
Drain Seal:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Type EYD.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or Type EZD.
Drain/Breather Fitting:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Type ECDB.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; ECD.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
11.
12.
B.
C.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Expansion Fitting:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Deflection/Expansion Movement:
a)
Appleton; Type DF.
b)
Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.
2)
Expansion Movement Only:
a)
Appleton; Type XJ.
b)
Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ.
c)
Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP.
Cable Sealing Fitting:
a.
To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit.
b.
For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at
connector entry.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; CG-S.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
E.
F.
3.
4.
H.
G.
New Construction:
a.
Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring,
pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp.
b.
Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or
Type WSK, as required.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
2.03
B.
Cast Metal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
4.
2.04
Cored-Hole Application:
a.
Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring,
and membrane clamp.
b.
Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM.
Type: One-piece.
Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum.
Coating:
a.
Exterior Surfaces: 40-mil PVC.
b.
Interior Surfaces: 2-mil urethane.
Manufacturers:
a.
Robroy Industries.
b.
Ocal.
Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet
and Device Boxes.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
D.
E.
3.
4.
5.
F.
NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group
involved.
Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-galvanize finished or copper-free
aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances.
Cover: Hinged with screws.
Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB.
b.
Appleton; Type AJBEW.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
G.
2.05
Provide outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of TIA 569B.
B.
C.
Terminal Blocks:
1.
2.
2.07
2.06
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Rating: Indoor.
E.
F.
G.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
H.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.08
Circle AW.
Hoffman.
Square D.
CABLE TRAYS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Barrier Strip: Vertical, solid type, with horizontal fittings and strip clamps.
Barrier strip to be installed in power and control cable tray.
F.
G.
H.
Provide next higher NEMA VE 1 class designation than required for support
of designed span length.
I.
Design Loads: Use working load adequate for actual cable installed plus
100 percent additional weight allowance for future cables plus 200-pound
concentrated static load applied between side rails at midspan, with safety
factor of 1.5 in accordance with NEMA VE 1, Table 3-1.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.09
B.
C.
Access: Provide cast concrete 6-inch or 12-inch risers and access hole
adapters between top of manhole and finished grade at required elevations.
D.
Drainage:
1.
2.
E.
Raceway Entrances:
1.
2.
3.
F.
G.
Cable Racks:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.10
ACCESSORIES
A.
Modular Type:
a.
Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes.
b.
Suitable for all types of conduit.
c.
Manufacturers:
1)
Underground Device, Inc.
2)
Carlon.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
B.
Template Type:
a.
Nonmetallic, custom made one-piece spacers.
b.
Suitable for all types of conduit.
c.
Material: HDPE or polypropylene, 1/2-inch minimum thickness.
d.
Conduit openings cut 1 inch larger than conduit outside diameter.
e.
Additional openings for stake-down, rebar, and concrete flow
through as required.
f.
Manufacturer and Product: SP Products; Quik Duct.
Identification Devices:
1.
2.
Raceway Tags:
a.
Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal.
b.
Shape: Round.
c.
Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved.
d.
Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.
Warning Tape:
a.
Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip.
b.
Color: Red.
c.
Width: Minimum 3 inches.
d.
Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below
tape.
e.
Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch-high permanent black
lettering imprinted continuously over entire length.
f.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Panduit; Type HTDU.
2)
Reef Industries; Terra Tape.
C.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors.
Reference Section 26 05 05, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for
aluminum conductors.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and
dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell
with reinforcing steel.
M.
N.
Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit,
PVC-coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp
locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound.
O.
Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation
of conductors, wires, or cables.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
P.
Q.
Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under
slab, with no part embedded within slab.
R.
Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right
angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.
S.
Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data
cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B.
B.
3.03
Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately
1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling
new conductors.
B.
C.
D.
Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls,
foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
3.04
Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times
conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.
Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum
separation of 1 inch.
Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of
expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints.
Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface
elevation in walls of water holding structures.
CONDUIT APPLICATION
A.
B.
Exterior, Exposed:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Interior, Exposed:
1.
2.
3.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
G.
Concrete-Encased Ductbank:
1.
2.
H.
Under Slabs-On-Grade:
1.
2.
3.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.05
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A.
For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type
transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations
approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize
vibration:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
3.06
B.
C.
D.
PENETRATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Entering Structures:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.07
SUPPORT
A.
B.
C.
D.
Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
3.08
Location/Type of Hardware:
a.
Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized.
b.
Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
c.
Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
E.
F.
BENDS
A.
B.
Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and
ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable
diameter, 15 inches minimum.
C.
D.
Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with
acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to
facilitate bending.
E.
Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with
same radius so that bends are parallel.
F.
G.
PVC Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
H.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.09
3.10
EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
PVC CONDUIT
A.
Solvent Welding:
1.
2.
B.
Adapters:
1.
2.
C.
3.11
3.12
B.
C.
WIREWAYS
A.
B.
C.
Applications:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.13
3.14
CABLE TRAYS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter
point of tray span.
E.
F.
Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet
of fitting extremity.
G.
H.
Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of 1/2 inch.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Ground Conductor: Provide properly sized clamps for each section, elbow,
tee, cross, and reducer.
TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A.
B.
C.
General:
a.
Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is
not required.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
2.
3.15
UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
A.
Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one
manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between
them, depending on surface contour.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
Spacers:
1.
2.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Metallic Raceway Coating: Along entire length, clean and paint in accordance
with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. When metallic raceways are
incased in concrete or are buried apply wraparound duct band with one-half
tape width overlap to obtain two complete layers or apply heat shrinkable
tubing.
K.
L.
M.
Concrete Encasement:
1.
2.
N.
3.16
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Install raceways with no part embedded within slab and with no interference
with slab on grade construction.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Under slab raceways that emerge from below slab to top of slab as exposed,
shall be located to avoid conflicts with structural slab rebar. Coordinate
raceway stub ups with location of structural rebar.
H.
Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
3.17
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Size:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
a.
2.
3.
C.
Locations:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Mounting Height:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
General:
a.
Dimensions given to centerline of box.
b.
Where specified heights do not suit building construction or
finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference.
c.
Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints.
Light Switch:
a.
48 inches above floor.
b.
When located next to door, install on lock side of door.
Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.
Telephone Outlet:
a.
15 inches above floor.
b.
6 inches above counter tops.
c.
Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor.
Convenience Receptacle:
a.
General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor.
b.
General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom
or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter
tops without backsplash.
c.
Industrial Areas: 48 inches above floor.
d.
Outdoor Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.
Special-Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown.
Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
Flush Mounted:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
F.
Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.18
G.
Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where
required by fixture terminal temperature.
H.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Mounting Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.
3.
4.
3.19
At or Below Grade:
1.
E.
Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in
locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways.
If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure
surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.
Obtain Owners written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas,
roadways, or walkways.
Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.
B.
C.
Install such that raceway enters at nearly right angle and as near as possible to
end of wall, unless otherwise shown.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
3.20
3.21
EMPTY RACEWAYS
A.
B.
Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells.
C.
D.
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Raceway Tags:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.22
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 1
e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
5.
1.04
B.
C.
Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been
installed.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 3
C.
D.
PART 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
Set, test, and calibrate, circuit breakers, power monitoring meters, and other
applicable devices in accordance with values established by short circuit,
coordination, and harmonics studies as specified in Section 26 05 70,
Electrical Systems Analysis.
E.
F.
G.
H.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Electrical Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
P.
Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type
required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 5
3.02
2.
3.
B.
3.03
PANELBOARDS
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.04
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 7
3.05
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
3.06
Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 1/0 and larger for:
a.
Physical damage.
b.
Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.
c.
Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturers minimum
allowable bending radius where applicable.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.
C.
3.07
d.
Color coding conformance with specification.
e.
Proper circuit identification.
Mechanical Connections For:
a.
Proper lug type for conductor material.
b.
Proper lug installation.
c.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12,
unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:
a.
Proper shield grounding.
b.
Proper terminations.
c.
Proper circuit identification.
Control Cables For:
a.
Proper termination.
b.
Proper circuit identification.
Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and
grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 9
f.
2.
3.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.08
3.09
General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100 amperes
and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 100 amperes and
larger.
B.
Proper mounting.
Proper conductor size.
Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
Cracked casings.
Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.12.
Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 11
7.
8.
C.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or
one-line diagram.
Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated
conductors.
METERING
A.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 12
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.11
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.12
Fall-of-Potential Test:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of
main ground systems resistance.
b.
Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no
greater than 5 ohm(s).
Two-Point Direct Method Test:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of
ground resistance between main ground system, equipment
frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points.
b.
Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system
resistance by 0.50 ohm.
B.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 13
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.13
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A.
B.
5.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 14
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
3.14
8.
9.
10.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 15
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 16
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
3.15
5.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 17
4.
5.
3.16
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
3.17
Visual Inspection:
1.
2.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 18
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
3.18
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Proper grounding.
Blockage of ventilating passageways.
Proper operation of jack water heaters.
Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
Overheating of engine or generator.
Proper installation of vibration isolators.
Proper cooling liquid type and level.
Operate engine-generator and check for:
a.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b.
Overheating.
c.
Correct rotation.
d.
Check resistance temperature detectors or generator inherent
thermal protectors for functionability and proper operation.
e.
Excessive vibration.
Verify voltage regulator and governor operation will cause unit speed
and output voltage to stabilize at proper values within reasonable length
of time.
Proper operation of meters and instruments.
Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line
diagram or approved Submittal.
Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives, and
active harmonic conditioners energized and operating under normal load
conditions.
2.
Cold start test by interrupting normal power source with test load
consisting of connected building load to verify:
a.
Transfer switch operation.
b.
Automatic starting operation.
c.
Operating ability of engine-generator.
d.
Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush currents.
Phase rotation tests.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 19
3.
4.
5.
6.
COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 20
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 12 02
OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
Descriptive information.
Dimensional Drawings.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
1.03
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage and deliver prior to Project
completion the following spare parts, and materials.
1.
2.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
One quart of paint to match color and quality of equipment final shop
finish.
Two spare fuse links for each replaceable fuse size.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cutler-Hammer.
B.
ABB.
C.
General Electric.
D.
GENERAL
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
TRANSFORMER
A.
B.
C.
D.
BIL Rating:
1.
2.
E.
F.
Impedance: 5.75 percent for transformers rated 750 kVA and above.
G.
H.
I.
Primary Taps:
1.
2.
3.
2.04
Full capacity, two 2-1/2 percent below and two 2-1/2 percent above,
rated voltage.
Externally operated no-load tap changer.
Provisions for locking handle in any position.
J.
K.
L.
ENCLOSURE
A.
B.
Welded carbon steel transformer tank, with cooling panels when required, and
lifting eyes.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
C.
D.
TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS
A.
General: IEEE C57.12.28, enclosed high and low voltage compartments side
by side, separated by steel barrier, bolted to transformer tank.
1.
B.
C.
Doors:
a.
Individual, full-height, air-filled.
b.
Low voltage door with three-point latching mechanism, vault type
handle, and single padlocking provision.
c.
High voltage door fastenings inaccessible until low voltage door
has been opened.
d.
Door Bolts: Hex-head type.
e.
Lift-off, stainless steel hinges and door stops.
f.
Removable front sill to facilitate rolling or skidding over conduit
stubs.
g.
Recessed lock pocket, with steel door release bolt adjacent to
secondary compartment door handle.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
11.
12.
2.06
BUSHINGS
A.
High Voltage:
1.
B.
2.
3.
2.08
Deadfront Termination:
a.
Provide 6 height voltage bushings in accordance with IEEE 386.
b.
Bushings externally clamped and front removable.
c.
Rated for 200 amperes continuous, 150 kV BIL.
d.
Standoff brackets located adjacent to bushings.
Low Voltage:
1.
2.07
Pressure-vacuum gauge.
Nameplate.
B.
C.
D.
2.
3.
4.
Accessibility:
a.
Bayonet expulsion fuse accessible through primary compartment.
b.
Current-limiting fuse accessible through tank handhole.
Expulsion Fuse for Low Current Faults: Interrupting capacity of
1,800 amperes rms asymmetrical.
Current Limiting for High Current Faults: Interrupting capacity of
50,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
Bayonet fuse externally replaceable with hot stick.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.09
SURGE ARRESTORS
A.
2.10
3.
2.11
2.12
B.
C.
FACTORY TESTS
A.
PART 3
3.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Adjust voltage taps to obtain rated output voltage under normal operating load
conditions.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 20 00
LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 1
1.03
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow
for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the
motor by its controller.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Descriptive information.
Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Additional Rating Information:
a.
Service factor.
b.
Locked rotor current.
c.
No load current.
d.
Multispeed load classification (for example, variable torque).
e.
Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example,
variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load
classification.
f.
Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor.
Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical).
Dimensions and total weight.
Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1
and NFPA 70.
Bearing type.
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Bearing lubrication.
Bearing life.
Space heater voltage and watts.
Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection.
Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the
motor.
Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system.
General Electric.
Reliance Electric.
MagneTek.
Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc., Motors and Drives Division.
Baldor.
U.S. Electrical Motors.
TECO-Westinghouse Motor Co.
Toshiba International Corp., Industrial Division.
WEG Electric Motors Corp.
GENERAL
A.
For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and
accessories of a single manufacturer.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 3
D.
E.
Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with
a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.
F.
G.
Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
2.03
2.04
2.05
HORSEPOWER RATING
A.
B.
C.
SERVICE FACTOR
A.
B.
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
2.06
Voltage
Phase
115
460
C.
D.
Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor
starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.
For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short-time rated
and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes,
trolleys, and hoists:
1.
2.
2.07
2.08
Efficiency:
a.
Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59.
b.
Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with
NEMA MG 1 Table 12-12, Full-load Efficiencies for NEMA
Premium Efficiency Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or Less
(Random Wound), or as indicated in motor-driven equipment
specification.
Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturers
standard or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.
B.
INSULATION SYSTEMS
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 5
C.
2.09
ENCLOSURES
A.
B.
TEFC and TENV: Furnish with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.
C.
Explosion-Proof (EXP):
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
D.
E.
B.
C.
Furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.
D.
Horsepower
Percentage
Below 600
15 through 125
500
Below 600
275
Below 600
225
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
2.11
Voltage
Horsepower
Percentage
Above 600
All sizes
200
Horizontal Motors:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Vertical Motors:
1.
2.
C.
Thrust Bearings:
a.
Antifriction bearing.
b.
Manufacturers standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller.
c.
Oil lubricated 125 hp and larger.
d.
Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
Guide Bearings:
a.
Manufacturers standard bearing type.
b.
Manufacturers standard lubrication 200 hp and smaller.
c.
Oil lubricated 250 hp and larger.
d.
Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 7
E.
2.12
2.13
NOISE
A.
B.
2.14
2.15
Inverter Duty Rated Motors, Bearing Isolation: Motors larger than 50 hp shall
have electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage.
EQUIPMENT FINISH
A.
External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturers standard. Field painting
in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
B.
Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy
varnish.
Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and
WPII enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1,
and attached with stainless steel screws.
B.
Space Heaters:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide winding space heaters with leads wired out to motor terminal
box.
Provide extra hole or hub on motor terminal box as required.
Unless shown otherwise, heater shall be suitable for 120V ac supply,
with wattage suitable for motor frame size.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
2.16
SPECIAL MOTORS
A.
B.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 9
4.
5.
E.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
Reliance Electric.
b.
ITT Flygt Corp.
At 100 Percent Load:
Submersible Pump Motors
Guaranteed
Minimum Efficiency
Guaranteed
Minimum Power
Factor
5 through 10
80
82
10.1 through 50
85
82
87
82
Horsepower
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Over 100
89
82
Insulation System: Manufacturers standard Class B or Class F.
Motor capable of running dry continuously.
Enclosure:
a.
Hermetically sealed, watertight, for continuous submergence up to
65-foot depth.
b.
Listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I,
Division 1, Group D hazardous atmosphere.
c.
Seals: Tandem mechanical.
Bearing and Lubrication:
a.
Permanently sealed and lubricated, replaceable antifriction guide
and thrust bearings.
b.
Minimum 15,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
Inrush kVA/horsepower no greater than NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70,
Code F.
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.17
FACTORY TESTING
A.
Tests:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 11
c.
4.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 12
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PART 2
2.01
Descriptive information.
Dimensions and weight.
Transformer nameplate data.
Schematic and connection diagrams.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 1
C.
Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full
NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Vibration Isolators:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.02
B.
Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for threephase units 3 kVA to 15 kVA.
Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and
above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Voltage Taps:
1.
E.
PART 3
3.01
Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two
above and two below normal voltage rating.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in
direct contact with mounting surface.
C.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 3
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 1
2.
3.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following
material:
Item
Touch-up paint for panelboards
PART 2
2.01
Quantity
One half-pint container
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 2
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
Or equal.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.02
B.
C.
GENERAL
A.
B.
Wire Terminations:
1.
2.
C.
2.
D.
E.
3.
F.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Bus:
1.
2.
I.
Trip Mechanism:
a.
Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each
pole.
b.
Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous
adjustment 3X to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps.
c.
Two and three pole, common trip.
d.
Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one
pole.
e.
Test button on cover.
f.
Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
Unacceptable Substitution:
a.
Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for
multi-pole breakers.
b.
Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole
spaces.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip
breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on
5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity,
for protection of personnel).
a.
Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.
b.
Push-to-test button.
c.
Reset button.
Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip
breaker specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on
30-mA ground fault (UL listed for equipment ground fault protection).
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
J.
Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for
termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box.
1.
2.
K.
Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination
of neutral conductors, and isolated from box.
1.
2.
L.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections,
and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings
indicated.
M.
2.03
Protective Device Locking: Furnish provisions for handle padlocking for main
and subfeed devices; also provide for branch devices where indicated.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 5
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.04
2.05
3.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Install top of cabinet trim78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown.
Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than
78 inches above the floor.
D.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
3.03
E.
F.
Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap
with nylon wire ties.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 7
SECTION 26 24 19
LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
E.
F.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Descriptive information.
Itemized Bill of Material.
Dimensional Drawings.
Front Panel Elevations.
Conduit entrance locations.
Bus data.
Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics.
Anchoring instructions and details.
Typed tabulation:
a.
Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings.
b.
Motor horsepower.
c.
Nameplate full load current.
d.
Measured load current and voltage.
e.
Overload model number and relay setting.
f.
Protective device trip settings.
g.
Manufacturers solid state starter switch or dip switch or program
settings.
h.
Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter
manufacturers overload heater or setting selection tables for
starters provided.
Control diagrams.
One-line diagrams.
Schematic (elementary) diagrams.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
d.
e.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.05
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer.
Or equal.
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
Control Transformer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
G.
H.
Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
I.
J.
Equipment Finish:
1.
2.
2.03
B.
Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
Phase loss, phase unbalanced and Class II ground fault protection.
Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip.
Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable.
N.O. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring.
Manual reset.
Provide in each ungrounded phase.
Mount within starter unit.
Communications: None.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.04
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and
UL 845.
Voltage Rating: As shown.
Short Circuit Rating: As shown on Drawings.
Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and
other devices to be front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise
noted.
NEMA ICS 18, Part 3.
a.
Class: I.
b.
Type: B.
Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Bus:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
c.
Readily interchangeable with starters of similar size.
d.
Pull-apart unit control wiring terminal boards on all units.
Starters:
a.
NEMA ICS 18, standard rating, except none smaller than
NEMA ICS, Size 1.
b.
Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volt, UL labeled
for 65,000 amperes at 480 volts short circuit capacity with
overload protection.
c.
Three-phase, nonreversing, unless specified otherwise.
d.
Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector.
e.
Combination Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter:
1)
Control: As shown on Drawings.
2)
Pilot Lights: RedON.
f.
Combination Adjustable Frequency Drive, Solid State Starter:
Drives as specified in Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable
Frequency Drive System.
g.
Communications: None.
h.
Padlockable operating handle when de-energized with up to threelock capability.
i.
Unit door interlocked to prevent opening when disconnect is in
closed position.
j.
Mechanical interlocked to prevent placing disconnect in ON
position when unit door is open.
k.
Minimum Dimensions: 12 inches high by full section width, less
vertical wireway.
Disconnecting Device:
a.
As indicated.
b.
Padlockable in OPEN position for up to three locks.
Circuit Breaker:
a.
Meet requirements of UL 489.
b.
Molded case with manufacturers recommended trip setting for
maximum motor protection.
c.
Magnetic trip only.
d.
Tripping indicated by operating-handle position.
e.
Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with shortcircuit capacity indicated.
Solid State Motor Overload Protection:
a.
Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
b.
Phase loss, phase unbalance and Class II ground fault protection.
c.
Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip.
d.
Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable.
e.
One N.O. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring.
f.
Manual reset.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
E.
Control Unit:
1.
2.
3.
F.
G.
g.
Provide in each ungrounded phase.
h.
Mount within starter unit.
i.
Communications: suitable for Ethernet/IP in the future
j.
Manufacturer and Model: Eaton C440 (or equal).
Motor Thermal Protector Interface: Manual-reset interposing relay for
connection to motor-mounted thermal protector system.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
f.
4.
5.
H.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General:
a.
Solid state device with LED displays.
b.
Direct voltage input up to 600V ac.
c.
Current input via current transformer with 5-ampere secondary.
d.
Programmable current and potential transformer ratios.
e.
Selectable Voltage Measurements: Line-to-line or line-to-neutral
and wye or delta.
f.
Communication: Ethernet TCP/IP
Simultaneous Display:
a.
Volts, three-phase.
b.
Amperes, three-phase.
Display
a.
Kilowatts.
b.
Kilowatt hours.
c.
Power factor.
d.
Frequency.
e.
kW Demand with programmable period intervals.
f.
kVA.
g.
kVAR.
h.
kVARh.
i.
Percent THD
j.
Minimum and Maximum THD values
Voltage Rating: 600 Vac
Provide a embedded Web Server to monitor meter with a laptop or over
a network
Minimum of 500Mb of memory for data storage and trending.
Manufacturers and Products: Eaton Power Expert 2270 (or equal).
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
I.
J.
K.
L.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.05
Factory Testing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430,
Part VIII.
Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA
requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification,
assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit
functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.
Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise,
inspect and perform continuity checks.
Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on
diagrams or as called for in Specification.
Control Circuits and Devices:
a.
Energize circuit at rated voltage.
b.
Operate control devices.
c.
Perform continuity check.
Instruments, Meters, Protective Relays, and Equipment:
a.
Verify devices functioned by energizing potential to rated values
with connection to devices made at outgoing terminal blocks.
b.
Verify protective relays operated for functional checks and trips
manually initiated to verify functioning of operation for indicator
and associated circuits.
Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except
potential transformers. Tests shall be made phase-to-phase and
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
9.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Overload Relay: Select and install overload relay heaters and switch settings
after actual nameplate full-load current rating of motor has been determined.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 24 20
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
E.
F.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Descriptive information.
Itemized Bill of Material.
Dimensional Drawings.
Front Panel Elevations.
Conduit entrance locations.
Bus data.
Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics.
Anchoring instructions and details.
Typed tabulation:
a.
Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings.
b.
Motor horsepower.
c.
Nameplate full load current.
d.
Measured load current and voltage.
e.
Protective device trip settings.
Control diagrams.
One-line diagrams.
Schematic (elementary) diagrams.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.05
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Allen-Bradley.
No or equal.
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.
D.
E.
F.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
H.
I.
Equipment Finish:
1.
2.
2.03
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and
UL 845.
Voltage Rating: As shown.
Short Circuit Rating: As shown on Drawings.
Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and
other devices to be front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise
noted.
NEMA ICS 18, Part 3.
a.
Class: I.
b.
Type: A.
Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Bus:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
E.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Communication:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Each VFD shall communicate with the plant control system via
Ethernet.
Each VFD shall have its own CAT6 cable home run to the local control
panel as shown.
There shall be no Ethernet switch within the MCC.
Control Unit:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
H.
I.
J.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.04
Control Wiring:
a.
Copper, 14 AWG, minimum.
b.
Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each
end of wires.
c.
Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp
terminals.
d.
Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal
blocks.
Factory Testing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430,
Part VIII.
Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA
requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification,
assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit
functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.
Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise,
inspect and perform continuity checks.
Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on
diagrams or as called for in Specification.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
7.
8.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
SWITCHES
A.
8.
B.
6.
7.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.02
RECEPTACLES
A.
9.
B.
C.
Receptacle, Special-Purpose:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 3
2.03
DEVICE PLATES
A.
B.
Cast Metal:
1.
2.
C.
Weatherproof:
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.04
Sheet Steel: Formed sheet steel or Feraloy designed for installation on castmetal box.
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that
is guided by riding against outside of box.
Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar,
cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate
raceway system, conductors, and cables.
Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not
cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to
cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall.
Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is
complete.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced
or terminated on devices.
Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from
stranded wire.
Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors.
b.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and
foreign matter.
c.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is
large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 5
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.02
SWITCH INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.03
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than
6 inches (150 mm) in length.
Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15-amp or
20-amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on device.
Device Plates:
a.
Do not use oversized or extra deep plate.
b.
Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device
plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening.
RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION
A.
Duplex Receptacle:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
B.
Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished
wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be
acceptable.
C.
Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has
no sharp corners or edges.
D.
E.
F.
Interior:
1.
2.
3.05
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles
in indoor locations.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes
where more than one circuit is present.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 7
3.06
B.
C.
Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
D.
E.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or
higher is not acceptable.
F.
G.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
H.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 29 23
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
4.
5.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 1
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Performance Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Design Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
2.03
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
COMPONENTS
A.
Drive Units:
1.
2.
3.
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 5
15.
16.
9)
Microprocessor fault.
10) Single-phase voltage condition.
Drive Protection:
a.
Fast-acting semiconductor fuses.
b.
Overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent trip.
c.
Dc undervoltage protection, 70 percent dropout.
d.
Dc overvoltage protection, 130 percent pickup.
e.
Overtemperature, drive, inverter, converter, and dc link
components.
f.
Overtemperature, motor, and pump.
g.
Single-phase protection.
h.
Reset overcurrent protection (manual or automatic reset).
i.
Active current limit/torque limit protection.
j.
Semiconductor fault protection.
k.
Short-circuit/ground fault protection.
l.
Serial communication fault protection.
m. Microprocessor fault.
n.
Surge protection for transient overvoltage (6,000 volts, 80 joule
surge, tested per IEEE C62.41).
o.
Visual display of specific fault conditions.
Operational Features:
a.
Use manufacturers standard unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Sustained power loss.
c.
Momentary power loss.
d.
Power interruption.
e.
Power loss ride through
f.
Electronic motor overload protection.
g.
Stall protection.
h.
Slip compensation.
i.
Automatic restart after power return (ability to enable/disable
function).
j.
Critical frequency lockout (three selectable points minimum, by
1.5-Hz steps in 10-Hz bands, to prevent resonance of system).
k.
Drive maintenance system software for complete programming
and diagnostics.
l.
Ground fault protection, drive, and motor.
m. Operate with no motor connected to output terminals.
B.
C.
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
volts to hertz up to 60-Hz; above 60-Hz, voltage shall remain constant with
drive operating in constant horsepower output mode.
D.
Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 7
E.
Operator Interface:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
f.
g.
F.
Signal Interface:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
2.
3.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
PART 3
3.01
Accessories:
1.
2.04
INSTALLATION
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 9
3.02
Functional Test:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.03
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 32 13.13
DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
2.
B.
1.04
Provided by Owner.
SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A.
1.06
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
Item
Diesel fuel line filter elements
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Quantity
3 complete sets
DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET
26 32 13.13 - 3
Item
PART 2
2.01
3 complete sets
Touch up paint
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
2.03
Quantity
Caterpillar.
Cummins.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
GENERAL
A.
Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
C.
Vibration Design:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.04
ENGINE
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Type:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Diesel Cycle, 4-stroke type with unit mounted radiator and fan cooling.
Minimum displacement shall be as recommended by generator
manufacturer.
Minimum number of cylinders shall be 6.
Starting System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
f.
g.
D.
Fuel System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Governing System:
1.
2.
3.
F.
3)
Power ON pilot light.
4)
AC failure relay and light.
5)
Low and high dc voltage alarm relay and light.
Alarm relay dry contacts rated 4 amps at 120V ac.
Wire battery charger status and alarm contacts back to generator
control panel, terminate and identify contacts.
2.
3.
4.
Radiator:
a.
Consisting of jacket water pump, fan assembly, fan guard, and
duct flange outlet.
b.
Cooling System: Rated for full load operation in 122 degrees F
(50 degrees C) ambient as measured at alternator air inlet.
c.
Fan: Suitable for use in a system with 0.5 in H2O restriction.
d.
Sized based on a core temperature that is 20 degrees F higher than
rated operation temperature.
Engine Thermostat: As recommended by manufacturer to regulate
engine water temperature.
Jacket Water Heater:
a.
Suitable for operation on 208volt, single-phase, 60-Hz current.
b.
Maintain engine water temperature at 120 degrees F with an
ambient temperature of 50 degrees F.
c.
Thermostatically controlled.
Engine Cooling Liquid: Fill cooling system with a 50/50-ethylene
glycol/water mixture prior to shipping.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
Lubrication System:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Exhaust System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
2.05
Type: Full-pressure.
Accessories:
a.
Pressure switch to initiate shutdown on low oil pressure.
b.
Oil filter with replaceable element. Filter shall not be above 6 feet
6 inches with subbase fuel tank.
c.
Bayonet type oil level stick.
d.
Valved oil drain extension.
e.
Accessories shall not be located above 6 feet 6 inches from floor.
If accessories are higher, provide aluminum platform to access
maintenance items.
Oil Cooling System: Water-cooled heat exchanger utilizing jacket water.
Air Intake System: Equip with dry type air cleaner with filter service
(restriction) indicator.
GENERATOR
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Insulation System:
1.
2.
C.
Excitation System:
1.
2.
D.
Voltage Regulation:
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.
Steady State Voltage Regulation: Less than plus or minus 1 percent from
no load to continuous rating point.
NEMA MG 1 Defined Transient Voltage Dip:
a.
Less than 20 percent at rapid application of rated load.
b.
Recovery to rated voltage and frequency within 2 seconds
following initial load application.
Steady State Frequency Regulation: Plus or minus 1.5-Hz overload
range.
F.
Short Circuit Capabilities: Sustain 300 percent of rated current for 10 seconds
for external three-phase bolted fault without exceeding rated temperatures.
G.
Main Terminations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.06
2.07
BASEPLATE
A.
B.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.08
2.09
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
B.
C.
CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
Control Panel:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Instrumentation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
D.
UL 508 listed.
Tested to meet or exceed IEEE 587 requirements for voltage surge
resistance.
Controls shall be solid-state, microprocessor based. Control panel shall
be designed and built by generator manufacturer and shall provide
operating, monitoring, and control functions for generator set.
Control Panel mounting height shall not exceed 6 feet 6 inches above
where personnel will access panel, Manufacturer shall modify mounting
height if a sub-base fuel tank is used.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
E.
External Interfaces:
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.10
Functional Requirements:
1.
2.
G.
Engine overcrank.
Low/high dc voltage.
General:
1.
2.
Provide generator set with outdoor enclosure, with entire package listed
under UL 2200.
Package shall comply with requirements of NEC for wiring materials
and component spacing.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Design total assembly of generator set, enclosure, and subbase fuel tank
(when used) to be lifted into place using spreader bars.
Housing:
a.
Provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in
ambient temperature of 100 degrees F.
b.
Doors:
1)
Hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for
operating and service functions.
2)
Lockable and include retainers to hold door open during
service.
Roof: Cambered to prevent rainwater accumulation.
Openings: Screened to limit access of rodents into enclosure.
Electrical power and control interconnections shall be made within
perimeter of enclosure.
Finishes:
a.
Prime sheet metal for corrosion protection and finish painted with
manufacturers standard color using a two-step electrocoating
paint process, or equal meeting performance requirements
specified below.
b.
Prime and paint surfaces of metal parts. Painting process shall
result in coating that meets the following requirements:
1)
Primer: 0.5 mil to 2.0 mils thick.
2)
Top Coat: 0.8 mil to 1.2 mils thick.
3)
Gloss:
a)
Per ASTM D523, 80 percent plus or minus 5 percent.
b)
Gloss retention after 1 year shall exceed 50 percent.
4)
Crosshatch Adhesion: Per ASTM D3359, 4B-5B.
5)
Impact Resistance: Per ASTM D2794, 120-inch to 160-inch
pounds.
6)
Salt Spray: Per ASTM B117, plus 1,000 hours.
7)
Humidity: Per ASTM D2247, plus 1,000 hours.
8)
Water Soak: Per ASTM D2247, plus 1,000 hours.
c.
Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other nonmetallic
service parts shall not be acceptable.
d.
Fasteners used shall be corrosion-resistant and designed to
minimize marring of painted surface when removed for normal
installation or service work.
e.
Outside Color: Sand (Neutral color).
Enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 12-gauge steel for
framework and 14-gauge steel for panels.
Hardware and hinges shall be austenitic stainless steel.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
2.11
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.12
Exhaust Silencer:
a.
Install factory-mounted exhaust silencer inside enclosure.
b.
Exhaust shall exit enclosure through a rain collar and terminate
with a rain cap.
c.
Exhaust connections to generator set shall be through seamless
flexible connections.
Maintenance Provisions:
a.
Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines that extend to
exterior of enclosure, with internal drain valves.
b.
External radiator-fill provision.
c.
External fuel fill provision (if equipped with a subbased fuel
tank).
Provide motorized louvers to minimize air flow through enclosure when
generator set is not operating. Louvers shall include provisions to
prevent accumulation of ice or snow that might prevent operation.
Inlet ducts shall include rain hoods.
Provide external emergency stop switch that is protected from accidental
actuation.
Provide factory mounted and wired electrical distribution panel to serve
generator set and enclosure. Provisions required include: Factory-wired
normal ac service from panelboard to engine coolant and alternator
heaters, battery charger, and battery heating plate.
Sound Attenuation:
a.
Provide with sound-attenuated housing which allows generator set
to operate at full rated load in an ambient temperature of up to
100 degrees F.
b.
Enclosure shall reduce sound level of generator set while
operating at full rated load to a maximum of 75 dBA at any
location 7 meters from generator set in a free field environment
when tested in accordance with SAE J1074.
Engine Generator Set and Instrument Panel: Factory-applied primer and two
finish coats of manufacturers standard heat-resistant engine paint.
FACTORY TESTS
A.
B.
Steady Load Test: Test engine generator set at steady load run of 60 minutes
minimum duration at 100 percent full-rated load.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Transient Load Test: Conduct transient load test to demonstrate ability to meet
load pickup and load release requirements specified.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
FIELD TESTS
A.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
Post-test Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 36 23
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled
or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization
acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The
City of Boise publishes a list of acceptable testing laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf
C.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Caterpillar.
B.
Cummins.
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Rated 100 percent, in amperes, for total system transfer of motor, electric
heating, discharge lamp loads, and tungsten-filament lamp loads.
1.
2.
F.
Switches rated 400 amperes and below suitable for 100 percent
tungsten-filament lamp loads.
Switches rated above 400 amperes suitable for 30 percent
tungsten-filament lamp loads.
Main and arcing contacts visible for inspection with cabinet door and barrier
covers removed.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
H.
I.
Current carrying capacity of arcing contacts shall not be used to determine the
transfer switch rating.
J.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.
K.
Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
2.03
ENCLOSURE
A.
B.
Dead front, front accessible wall mounted cabinet with 14-gauge welded steel
construction.
C.
D.
2.04
TRANSFER SWITCH
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
F.
Main and arcing contacts visible when door is open and barrier covers
removed.
G.
Manual operating handle for transfer in either direction under either loaded or
unloaded conditions.
H.
Internal control wire connections made with ring or spade type terminals, lock
washers, and sleeve type marking labels.
CONTROL MODULE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Adjustable solid state undervoltage sensors for all three phases of normal and
for one phase of standby source:
1.
2.
E.
F.
G.
Form-C start contacts, rated 10 amperes, 32-volt dc, for two-wire engine
control, wired to terminal block.
H.
I.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.06
B.
2.07
2.08
INDICATORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Provide one normally open and one normally closed, 5 amperes, 120-volt
contact for remote indication when transfer switch is in either position.
FACTORY TESTS
A.
B.
PART 3
3.01
3 phase amps.
L-G, L-L, 3 phase volts.
Frequency.
Watts.
INSTALLATION
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 43 00
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit manufacturers UL certified test data and nameplate data for each
TVSS.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.
B.
PART 2
2.01
For power and signal circuits, TVSS devices shall comply with
UL 1449 and complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic
interference filter. Provide units that are listed and labeled by UL.
For telephone circuit protection, TVSS devices shall comply with
UL 497A.
GENERAL
A.
All TVSS devices for power circuits, provided under this section, shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.
B.
C.
TVSS devices shall be fused to disconnect the suppressor from the electrical
source should the suppressor fail. The fusing shall allow full surge handling
capabilities and to afford safety protection from thermal overloads and short
circuits.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.02
2.03
D.
Design TVSS devices for the specific type and voltage of the electrical
service. Single-phase and three-phase wye-configured systems shall have L-N,
L-G, and N-G protection. Grounded delta-configured systems shall have L-L
and L-G protection.
E.
Power Filter: The TVSS shall include a high frequency extended range power
filter complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic interference
filter.
MANUFACTURER
A.
B.
C.
General Electric.
B.
2.04
C.
Suppressor housing shall be in an enclosure that has the same NEMA rating as
the equipment it protects and painted to match.
D.
System Voltage
Phase
L-L or L-N
Suppression Voltage
480Y/277
800
PANELBOARD TVSS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
2.05
C.
Suppressor shall be in an enclosure that has the same NEMA rating as the
panel it protects or the TVSS may be integral to a panelboard.
D.
Phase
120
400
208Y/120
400
480
800
SURGE COUNTER
A.
PART 3
3.01
System Voltage
ANNUNCIATION
A.
2.06
Provide each TVSS rated above 100 kA with a counter displaying the number
of voltage transients that have occurred on the unit input. The counter shall be
battery backed and retain the count through system power outages.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Main Distribution TVSS in or near each motor control center that is fed
directly from a transformer.
Panelboard TVSS In or near each panelboard unless otherwise
indicated.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
B.
C.
D.
Field installed conductors shall be the same as specified for building wire, not
smaller than No. 8 AWG and not larger than No. 4 AWG. Device leads shall
not be longer than the length recommended by the manufacturer, unless
specifically reviewed and approved by the manufacturer.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 43 10
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.03
As shown on Drawings.
B.
1.04
AHC unit.
Accessories, as specified.
Number Required (AHC plus accessories): One.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
C.
D.
E.
Modes of Operation:
1.
2.
F.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.06
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
1.
Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current rating installed.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
PART 2
2.01
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
1.07
GENERAL
A.
B.
Equipment Finish:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
2.02
2.03
Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled
or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization
acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The
City of Boise publishes a list of acceptable testing laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf
B.
Input Power:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Output Performance:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Environmental Conditions: The AHC shall be suitable for use under the
following environmental conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
E.
Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
See Section 26 24 19, Low Voltage Motor Control for AHCs that are
installed in motor control centers.
Each AHC shall be provided in a NEMA 250, Type 1-rated enclosure.
Units shall not have any ventilation openings on the back. Provide
filtered ventilation as required.
Units with total cancellation current ratings of 100 amperes and less
may be designed for free-standing (conduit entry/exit through top and
bottom) or wall-mounting (conduit entry/exit through top or bottom)
installation. Units rated greater than 100 amperes shall be designed for
free-standing installation.
Freestanding units shall include a door-interlocked disconnect that
provides power interruption when the door is opened. Disconnect shall
be lockable in the power-off position. Door shall have continuous hinge
three-point locking mechanism.
Freestanding units shall include lifting lugs or other suitable lifting
provisions.
All units shall be provided with an identified grounding lug.
The enclosure finishing shall be the manufacturers standard type and
color.
F.
G.
AHC shall be designed and equipped to limit radiated and conducted EMI in
accordance with FCC and/or EU EMC directives.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
H.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
2.05
B.
C.
D.
E.
Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists and final certified and
signed test report.
PART 3
3.01
DELIVERY
A.
For AHC installed in an motor control center, see Section 26 24 19, Low
Voltage Motor Control.
B.
C.
Factory test results shall be reviewed and accepted by Seller before AHC is
shipped.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
E.
Extra Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
3.03
B.
C.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Test control and signal wiring for proper termination and function.
J.
K.
L.
M.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
6.
7.
8.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Shop s:
a.
Interior Luminaires:
1)
Catalog data sheets and pictures.
2)
Photometrics.
3)
Mounting or suspension details.
b.
Exterior Luminaires:
1)
Catalog data sheets and pictures.
2)
IESNA lighting classification and isolux diagram.
3)
Fastening details to wall or pole.
4)
Ballast type, location, and method of fastening.
c.
Lamps:
1)
Voltages.
2)
Colors.
3)
Approximate life (in hours).
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 1
d.
e.
1.03
1.04
4)
Approximate initial lumens.
5)
Lamp type and base.
Ballasts:
1)
Type.
2)
Wiring diagram.
3)
Nominal watts and input watts.
4)
Input voltage and power factor.
5)
Sound rating.
6)
Temperature rating.
7)
Efficiency ratings.
8)
Low temperature characteristics.
9)
Emergency ballasts rating and capacity data.
Photocells:
1)
Voltage, and power consumption.
2)
Capacity.
3)
Contacts and time delay.
4)
Operating levels.
5)
Enclosure type and dimensions.
6)
Temperature range.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled
or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization
acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The
City of Boise publishes a list of acceptable testing laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf
B.
Aluminum Poles:
1.
2.
3.
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 2
4.
5.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
LUMINAIRES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Exterior Installations:
1.
2.
2.02
LAMPS
A.
Fluorescent:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.03
BALLASTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 3
B.
Fluorescent (Electronic):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.04
EMERGENCY BALLAST
A.
B.
C.
Solid state charging indicator monitoring light and double-pole test switch.
D.
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.05
LIGHTING CONTROL
A.
Photocell:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.06
POLES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Handhole:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Aluminum Poles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 5
2.07
Features:
1.
2.
3.
2.08
2.09
2.10
POLE FOUNDATIONS
A.
Anchor Bolts: Steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the
top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized.
B.
C.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
FACTORY FINISH
A.
2.11
Fuse Holder:
1.
2.
B.
Fuse:
1.
2.
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
PART 3
3.01
LUMINAIRES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Mounting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General:
a.
Mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions shall be
coordinated with Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements.
b.
Refer to Fastener Schedule in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
Wall Mounted: Measure mounting heights from center of mounting
plate to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
Suspended:
a.
Chain or cable suspension is not allowed. Swinging suspension is
not allowed. Support luminaire with a minimum of two points of
contact, one at each end.
b.
Support for suspended luminaire shall consist of framing channel,
and/or threaded rod.
c.
Mount luminaire at height as shown in Drawings.
d.
Measure mounting heights from bottom of luminaire to finished
floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
Pole Mounted: Provide cast-in-place concrete base.
Provide branch circuit in-line fuses in pole base handhole.
Grounding: Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including
metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic
enclosures as specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding. Where copper
grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide
specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 7
C.
Finished Areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
E.
3.02
LAMPS
A.
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 8
Provide in each fixture, number and type for which fixture is designed, unless
otherwise noted.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.03
3.04
BALLASTS
A.
B.
C.
LIGHTING CONTROL
A.
3.05
3.06
EMERGENCY BALLAST
A.
Install battery, charger, and electronic circuitry metal case inside fluorescent
fixture housing adjacent to ac ballast.
B.
C.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 9
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
h.
i.
j.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Coded: Audible or visible signal that conveys information about alarm event.
Examples are, number of rings of a bell or flashes of a strobe. This could be
used to convey location or type of alarm.
E.
dB: Decibels.
F.
G.
H.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
I.
J.
I/O: Input/Output.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Zone: A defined area within the protected premises. A zone can define an area
from which an alarm signal can be received or an area to which a signal can be
sent. The term zone is typically used when describing conventional,
non-addressable systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
1.06
SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A.
1.07
MAINTENANCE
A.
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
GENERAL
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
2.03
2.04
UL COMPLIANCE
A.
B.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Ambient Temperature:
1.
2.
C.
2.05
Indoor:
a.
Maximum 40 degrees C.
b.
Minimum 5 degrees C.
Outdoor:
a.
Maximum 50 degrees C.
b.
Minimum -29 degrees C.
B.
POIs shall be framed in extruded metal frames, mounted under glass and shall
be water/weather resistant. Instructions shall be permanently mounted on
reserved wall area in space shown on Drawings.
C.
2.
Facility floor plans showing location of fire equipment and devices with
coordinated identification. Show items such as firewalls, fire dampers,
and fire alarm devices.
Fire alarm wiring diagrams and schematics, with zone
identification with transmitter zone lists and device address list.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.06
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Control panel circuit for 24V dc, power limited, initiating circuits per
NFPA 70, Article 760.
Assembled panel UL 864 listed Product Category UOJ2, as an
integrated control system.
Enclosure:
a.
NEMA 250 Type 1.
b.
Color: Red.
Internally Mounted Module with:
a.
Transformer with 120 V ac input and 21.5V ac output.
b.
Solid state rectifier for 21.5V ac input and fuse protected, filtered,
and regulated 26V dc no-load output.
c.
Solid state transfer switch, minimum 8 amp-hours.
d.
Standby sealed, gelled electrolyte (lead acid) batteries sized for
system operating period of 24 hours of standby mode operation.
e.
Solid state battery charger.
f.
Over/under voltage monitor supervisory circuit.
g.
LEDs for status of normal power, battery trouble, and power
supply module trouble.
h.
Alarm mode of 10 minutes after standby operation.
Local differentiating audible sound device for alarm, trouble, and
supervisory conditions.
Full digital transmission protocol.
Addressable signal transmission protocol to be either digital
pole/response protocol or proprietary communication protocol, with all
antilog sensing device signals digitally transmitted to control panel.
Digital alarm communicator output circuitry for remote alarm control
panel.
MOV/gas discharge transient protection for power supply module, plus
initiating and indicating alarm devices.
For addressable systems provide additional 20 percent capacity for
future indicating and initiating devices.
EMI/RF Protection:
a.
Protect control equipment, devices, and wiring against unwanted
radiated electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and from affects of
audio and radio frequencies (RF) that can cause transmission of
spurious alarms.
b.
System shall be designed and installed so as to be unaffected (with
control cabinet faceplates installed) by operation of handheld,
portable radios of up to 5 watts, or portable cellular telephones up
to 1 watt, within 12 inches of system components.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
8.
2.07
2.08
2.09
2.10
Solid state circuitry with integral LED visual alarm, dip switch or program
selectable addressing, and common base receptacle for ionization,
photoelectric, and heat detectors. Device address shall be located in base.
B.
C.
B.
C.
Monitor module with solid state circuitry for Class B circuits serving dry
contact initiating devices.
B.
Control module with solid state circuitry for supervised control functions.
C.
Module shall provide 120V, 2A rated dry contact for controlling shut down of
HVAC systems.
D.
INITIATING DEVICE
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Heat Detector:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Smoke Detector:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.11
ALARMS
A.
B.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
2.
D.
E.
2.13
WIRING
A.
B.
Low voltage wiring shall be solid copper or bunch tinned (bonded) stranded
copper, minimum 14 AWG, and shall meet NEC Article 760 for nonpower
limited service.
C.
RACEWAYS
A.
2.14
Signs:
1.
2.
2.12
Conduit used for installation of Fire Alarm or Ventilation Alarm system shall
follow requirements as identified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.
END-OF-LINE RESISTORS
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.15
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Coordinate with other trades for mounting and interfacing with fire alarm
system related devices.
B.
Install control panels, initiating and alarm devices, conduit, and wiring for
interconnection of devices specified herein for complete and operable system.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install and connect fire detection and alarm equipment in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and recommendations, and in accordance with
applicable codes and standards.
B.
C.
Provide outlet and junction boxes that are compatible with raceway system.
D.
E.
Arrange sampling tubes and duct detectors to monitor duct area and point of
duct penetration sealed and reinsulated.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.03
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Duct Smoke Detector: Furnish, wire, and connect to fire alarm system in
accordance with this Specification. Installed in accordance with
Section 23 09 13, HVAC Controls, Field Components, and Instruments.
M.
HVAC Equipment: Wire and connect fire alarm system to air handling
system, smoke exhaust fan and smoke damper control circuits, and fan status
contacts
N.
CONDUIT
A.
B.
Conduit systems shall be dedicated to fire alarm system and shall contain no
unrelated conductors.
C.
Fire alarm system conduits shall be of sizes and types specified under
Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
D.
Route and install conduit to minimize potential for physical damage, either
mechanical or by fire, and so as not to interfere with existing building systems,
facilities or equipment, and to facilitate service and minimize maintenance.
Coordinate installation between different trades to avoid conflicts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
3.05
E.
F.
G.
Pull boxes, junction boxes, conduit bodies, and terminal cabinets shall be
painted fire engine red prior to installation. Provide touch-up painting, of
normally visible pull boxes, junction boxes, and terminal cabinets prior to
final acceptance testing.
H.
I.
J.
Detection and alarm wire shall be installed in separate conduits. Outgoing and
return conductors for each supervised circuit shall be routed in separately as
required by NFPA 72. The minimum separation of outgoing and return
conduits shall be 1 foot vertically and 4 feet horizontally.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Junction, terminal, and pulling box covers shall be painted red and identified
with engraved labels by loop number and circuit that it contains.
B.
CONDUCTORS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
5.
New; wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation shall not
be used.
Installed in conduit.
Continuous between devices and between devices and intermediary
terminal cabinets.
Low voltage conductors shall be minimum size No. 14 AWG. Smaller
conductors shall only be permitted where part of a manufacturers
specific communications cable, i.e. addressable system.
In accordance with requirements of NEC, Article 760 for nonpower
limited service.
C.
D.
Types:
1.
2.
E.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Fully dressed and bundled with nylon tie wraps at 3-inch intervals.
Bundled wiring shall be routed parallel to terminal strips within control
panels, with individual conductors turned out at 90 degree angles to
their associated terminal connections.
AC power conductors shall be bundled and routed separately from low
voltage conductors. A minimum 2-inch separation shall be maintained
between ac power conductors and low voltage conductors wherever
possible.
Control cabinets shall be sized to accommodate the requirements of this
Section.
Control panels shall not be used as raceways. Conductors that do not
terminate within a control panel shall not be routed through that control
panel.
H.
I.
J.
Install as nonpower limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 72, and NEC,
Article 760.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Circuits shall be megger tested to voltage rating of their insulation before final
terminations are made.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.06
3.07
3.08
Install TVSS for fire alarm control panel per manufacturers requirements.
REPAIR/RESTORATION
A.
B.
C.
Keep covers on smoke detectors until areas have been thoroughly cleaned.
B.
C.
D.
Each smoke detector shall be individually field tested prior to installing device
at its designated location to ensure reliability after shipment and storage
conditions. A dated log indicating system address, type of device, sensitivity
and initials of technician performing test, using test equipment specifically
designed for that purpose, shall be prepared and kept for final acceptance
documentation. After testing detection devices, base shall be labeled with
system address, date, and initials of installing technician. Labeling shall not be
visible after installation is complete.
E.
Test wiring runs for continuity, short circuits, and grounds before system is
energized. Resistance, current, and voltage readings shall be made as work
progresses.
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
G.
2.
3.
4.
H.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
I.
3.09
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
Prepare Site only after adequate erosion and sediment controls are in place.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SITE CLEARING
31 10 00 - 1
PART 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for Site improvements within
limits shown or specified.
B.
LIMITS
A.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.03
Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits.
CLEARING
A.
B.
Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated
for removal.
C.
Cut stumps not designated for grubbing flush with ground surface.
D.
Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 2 inches of ground surface.
SITE CLEARING
31 10 00 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
GRUBBING
A.
3.05
3.06
3.07
SCALPING
A.
Do not remove sod until after clearing and grubbing is completed and
resulting debris is removed.
B.
STRIPPING
A.
B.
C.
DISPOSAL
A.
B.
C.
Strippings:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SITE CLEARING
31 10 00 - 3
SECTION 31 23 13
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
31 23 13 - 1
PART 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
GENERAL
A.
Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or
proof-rolling.
B.
C.
Do not use sections of prepared ground surface as haul roads. Protect prepared
subgrade from traffic.
D.
COMPACTION
A.
B.
TESTING
A.
3.04
CORRECTION
A.
B.
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
31 23 13 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 31 23 16
EXCAVATION
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals:
1.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.03
1.04
WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A.
B.
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
EXCAVATION
31 23 16 - 1
PART 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
A.
3.03
TRENCH WIDTH
A.
2.
3.
B.
3.04
Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until
material is needed.
EXCAVATION
31 23 16 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.05
B.
Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are
readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be
clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated
position.
C.
D.
E.
DISPOSAL OF SPOIL
A.
B.
C.
Dispose of debris resulting from removal of organic matter, trash, refuse, and
junk as specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, for clearing and grubbing
debris.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
EXCAVATION
31 23 16 - 3
SECTION 31 23 19.01
DEWATERING
PART 1
PART 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
3.02
3.03
B.
DEWATERING SYSTEMS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Provide 100 percent emergency power backup with automatic startup and
switchover in event of electrical power failure.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
DEWATERING
31 23 19.01 - 1
3.04
DISPOSAL OF WATER
A.
B.
C.
D.
Discharge water as required by discharge permit and in manner that will not
cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed
Work, or adjacent property.
END OF SECTION
DEWATERING
31 23 19.01 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 31 23 23
FILL AND BACKFILL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
Relative Compaction:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
C.
D.
E.
Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase
of Work.
F.
G.
Well-Graded:
1.
2.
3.
H.
I.
J.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
B.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.05
B.
C.
D.
Do not place fill materials (structural fill, granular fill, select structural fill, or
general fill, etc.) until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in
Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Gradation Tests: Perform a minimum of one gradation test per material type.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
Excavated material from required excavations free from rocks larger than
3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and
other deleterious materials.
B.
STRUCTURAL FILL
A.
B.
Select structural fill shall consist of imported material or material from onsite
excavations that is selectively borrowed or screened to meet the requirement
herein.
B.
Select structural fill shall meet the requirements of Standard Specifications for
Highway Construction, Section 703.11, Aggregate for Granular Subbase,
except that no more than 2 percent shall pass the No. 200 sieve. The minimum
R-value requirement does not apply and R-value testing is not required.
GRANULAR FILL
A.
2.06
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.07
2.08
2.09
B.
C.
The type specified for the specific site location uses as shown on the
Drawings.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during
placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.
B.
Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform
thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to
specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where
necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement
surfaces drained of water.
C.
During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each
structure and buried tank even.
D.
E.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
G.
3.02
Under Facilities and Beneath Concrete Slabs: Within influence area beneath
structures, pavements, curbs, piping, conduits, duct banks, and other facilities,
backfill with structural fill to 6 inches below the bottom of facility and slab,
and then with granular fill to the bottom of facility and slab, unless otherwise
shown. Place structural fill in lifts of 8-inch maximum thickness and granular
fill in lifts of 6-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of
98 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with
ASTM D698.
B.
C.
3.03
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
SITE TESTING
A.
Gradation:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.05
2.
3.
4.
3.07
Structural Fill, Select Structural Fill, and Granular Fill: One test for
every lift placed.
3.06
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 31 23 23.15
TRENCH BACKFILL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 1
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from
prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe,
conduit, cable or duct bank.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
GEOTEXTILE
A.
2.02
MARKING TAPE
A.
Nondetectable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Detectable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 3
C.
Facility
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Potable water
Purple
TRACER WIRE
A.
Material: Minimum 12-gauge solid copper or copper jacket with a steel core,
with high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or high-molecular weight
polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury.
B.
Splices: Use wire nut or lug suitable for direct burial as recommended by
tracer wire manufacturer.
C.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.04
2.05
B.
Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as
determined in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock
within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless
otherwise specified.
1.
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.06
2.07
CONCRETE BACKFILL
A.
2.09
GENERAL BACKFILL
A.
2.08
PVC Irrigation System Piping and Ductile Iron Pipe with Polyethylene
Wrap: 3/8-inch maximum particle size.
Pipe Under 18-Inch Diameter: 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except
1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe
under 3-inch diameter.
Pipe 18-Inch Diameter and Greater: 1-1/2-inch maximum particle size
for ductile iron pipe, concrete pipe, welded steel pipe, and pretensioned
or prestressed concrete cylinder pipe.
Perforated Pipe: Granular drain material.
Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable:
a.
Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200
sieve.
b.
Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges.
c.
Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve.
d.
If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that
passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in
accordance with ASTM D4318.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 5
2.10
2.11
TOPSOIL
A.
2.12
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
TRENCH PREPARATION
A.
Water Control:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.02
General backfill.
Trench stabilization material.
Bedding and pipe zone material.
Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that
falls into trench.
TRENCH BOTTOM
A.
Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material,
and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space
for bedding material if shown or specified.
B.
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.03
GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
A.
2.
3.
3.04
3.05
Extend geotextile for full width of trench bottom and up the trench wall
to the top of the pipe zone, or base material for manholes and
miscellaneous structures.
Anchor geotextile trench walls prior to placing trench stabilization or
bedding material.
Provide 24-inch minimum overlap at joints.
B.
Place material over full width of trench in 6-inch lifts to required grade,
providing allowance for bedding thickness.
C.
Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding
material prior to placing succeeding lifts.
BEDDING
A.
B.
Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when
required depth exceeds 8 inches.
C.
Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface.
D.
E.
Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch
to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to
provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct-buried
cable, or duct bank.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 7
3.06
F.
G.
B.
Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their
movement during backfill operations.
C.
3.07
Pipe 10-Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to
1/2 pipe diameter.
Pipe Over 10-Inch Diameter: Maximum 6-inch lifts.
D.
Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld
tamping bars supplemented by walking in and slicing material under
haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing
each succeeding lift.
E.
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.08
3.09
B.
C.
D.
Bring tracer wire to surface at each valve box, curb box, vault, air valve,
blowoff valve, hydrant, and pipeline marker. Tracer wire shall be brought to
surface at least every 1,000 feet. If distance between pipe appurtenances
exceeds 1,000 feet, install valve box to allow access to tracer wire. Mark valve
box cover with the word TRACER. Coil enough excess tracer wire at each
appurtenance to extend wire 12 inches above ground.
E.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Class A Backfill:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 9
3.10
3.11
3.12
REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL
A.
B.
Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as
necessary to restore drainage.
B.
Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as
necessary to keep surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground
surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep surface of backfilled
trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic
flow.
C.
D.
E.
Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep surface of
backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.
SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL
A.
TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 31 32 19.16
GEOTEXTILE
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 1
1.02
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
B.
1.04
Shop Drawings:
a.
Manufacturer material specifications and product literature.
b.
Description of proposed method of geotextile deployment; sewing
equipment and methods, if used; and provisions for holding
geotextile temporarily in place until permanently secured.
Samples:
a.
Geotextile: One-piece, minimum 18 inches long, taken across full
width of roll of each type and weight of geotextile furnished for
Project. Label each with brand name and furnish documentation
of lot and roll number from which each Sample was obtained.
B.
GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
1.05
B.
PART 2
2.01
Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with
suitable wrapping for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure.
Store geotextile in way that protects it from elements. If stored outdoors,
elevate and protect geotextile with waterproof cover.
PRODUCTS
NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Requirement
Test Method
Water Permittivity
ASTM D4751
ASTM D4632
Grab Elongation,
Machine Direction
50 percent, MaxARV
ASTM D4632
80 lb, MinARV
ASTM D4533
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ASTM D4491
(Constant Head)
GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 3
2.02
SEWING THREAD
A.
B.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
LAYING GEOTEXTILE
A.
3.02
JOINTS
A.
3.03
3.05
3.06
SECURING GEOTEXTILE
A.
3.04
Lay and maintain geotextile smooth and free of tension, folds, wrinkles, or
creases.
B.
B.
After granular drain material is placed to required grade, fold geotextile over
top of granular drain material, unless otherwise shown. Maintain overlap until
overlying fill or backfill is placed.
REPAIRING GEOTEXTILE
A.
GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Repair Procedure:
1.
2.
3.
3.07
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 5
SECTION 32 11 23
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.02
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
BASE COURSE OR LEVELING COURSE
A.
Physical Qualities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
(Square Opening)
Material
Base Course or
Leveling Course3/4 in
(Type 1)
100
90-100
25 mm (1")
100
19 mm (3/4")
90-100
55-83
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Table 1
Gradation
Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve Designation
Material
(Square Opening)
Base Course or
Leveling Course3/4 in
(Type 1)
(No. 4)
40-65
30-60
(No. 8)
30-50
(No. 30)
75 m (No. 200)
2.02
2.03
3-9
0-8
SUBBASE COURSE
A.
Clean, tough, uniform quality, durable fragments of crushed rock, free from
flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces, or other objectionable matter
occurring either free or as coating on stone. Gradation as specified in Table 1.
B.
B.
C.
PART 3
3.01
10-25
EXECUTION
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
3.02
EQUIPMENT
A.
3.03
Hauling Materials:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Spreading Materials:
1.
2.
3.
3.04
CONSTRUCTION OF COURSES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
6.
B.
Subbase Course:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.05
3.06
B.
Roll each layer of material until material does not creep under roller before
succeeding layer is applied.
C.
Commence rolling at outer edges and continue toward center; do not roll
center of road first.
D.
E.
Place and compact each lift to required density before succeeding lift is
placed.
F.
G.
H.
Finished surface shall be true to grade and crown before proceeding with
surfacing.
SURFACE TOLERANCES
A.
Blade or otherwise work surfacing as necessary to maintain grade and crosssection at all times, and to keep surface smooth and thoroughly compacted.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Gravel Surfacing: Within 0.04 foot from lower edge of 10-foot straightedge
placed on finished surface, parallel to centerline. Overall Average: Within
plus or minus 0.01 foot from crown and grade specified.
D.
Gravel Resurfacing:
1.
2.
3.
3.07
3.08
Test Method
Frequency
Sampling
Point
Gradation
Roadbed after
processing
Moisture Density
(Maximum
Density)
AASHTO T99,
Method D
Production
output or
stockpile
In-Place Density
and Moisture
Content
In-place
completed,
compacted
area
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess material from the Work area. Clean stockpile and staging
areas of all excess aggregate.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 1
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.02
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals:
1.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 3
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Sand (Blotter Material): Clean, dry, with 100 percent passing No. 4 sieve, and
a maximum of 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.
General:
1.
2.
B.
C.
Aggregate:
1.
2.
3.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
4.
5.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Traffic Control:
1.
2.
B.
3.02
3.03
B.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
Sawcut a minimum of 1 foot width (or as shown on the plans) at meet lines of
existing pavement surfaces, immediately prior to placing asphalt concrete, to
remove damaged or broken pavement and to provide a smooth edge for
joining the new pavement. The Contractor is responsible for re-cutting edges
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 5
PAVEMENT APPLICATION
A.
B.
Tack Coat:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Pavement Mix:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Prior to Paving:
a.
Sweep primed surface free of dirt, dust, or other foreign matter.
b.
Patch holes in primed surface with asphalt concrete pavement
mix.
Place asphalt concrete pavement mix in one single lift.
Compacted Lift Thickness:
a.
Minimum: Twice maximum aggregate size, but in no case less
than 2 inch.
b.
Maximum: 3 inches.
Total Compacted Thickness: As shown.
Apply such that meet lines are straight and edges are vertical.
Collect and dispose of segregated aggregate from raking process. Do not
scatter material over finished surface.
Joints:
a.
Offset edge of each layer a minimum of 6 inches so joints are not
directly over those in underlying layer.
b.
Offset longitudinal joints in roadway pavements so longitudinal
joints in wearing layer coincide with pavement centerlines and
lane divider lines.
c.
Form transverse joints by cutting back on previous days run to
expose full vertical depth of layer.
Succeeding Lifts: Apply tack coat to pavement surface between each
lift.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
9.
D.
Compaction:
1.
2.
E.
Roll until roller marks are eliminated and minimum density of percent
of mix design unit weight at optimum asphalt content is obtained.
Joint Compaction:
a.
Place top or wearing layer as continuously as possible.
b.
Pass roller over unprotected end of freshly laid mixture only when
placing of mix is discontinued long enough to permit mixture to
become chilled.
c.
Cut back previously compacted mixture when Work is resumed to
produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of layer.
d.
Cut away waste material and lay new mix against fresh cut.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.05
PATCHING
A.
Preparation:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 7
B.
Application:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Compaction:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.06
Finished surface shall be flush with and match grade, slope, and crown
of adjacent surface.
Tolerance: Surface smoothness shall not deviate more than plus 1/4 inch
when straightedge is laid across patched area between edges of new
pavement and surface of old surfacing.
B.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Testing Frequency:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 9
SECTION 32 16 00
CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
2.02
2.03
2.04
A.
B.
C.
CURING COMPOUND
PART 3
INSTALLATION
A.
3.02
CONCRETE
A.
3.01
FORMWORK
A.
Lumber Materials:
1.
2.
B.
C.
Setting Forms:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
Bracing:
1.
2.
E.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.03
3.04
Do not vary tops of forms from gradeline more than 1/8-inch when
checked with 10-foot straightedge.
Do not vary alignment of straight sections more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet.
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Prior to placing concrete, remove water from excavation and debris and
foreign material from forms.
B.
Place concrete as soon as possible, and within 1-1/2 hours after adding cement
to mix without segregation or loss of ingredients, and without splashing.
C.
D.
CURB CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
C.
Curb Facing: Do not allow horizontal joints within 7 inches from top of curb.
D.
Contraction Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
Front Face:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Backfill curb with earth upon completion of curing period, but not before
7 days has elapsed since placing concrete.
1.
2.
3.05
Remove front form and finish exposed surfaces when concrete has set
sufficiently to support its own weight.
Finish formed face by rubbing with burlap sack or similar device to
produce uniformly textured surface, free of form marks, honeycomb,
and other defects.
Remove and replace defective concrete.
Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces of curb upon completion of
finishing.
Continue curing for minimum of 5 days.
Backfill shall be free from rocks 2 inches and larger and other foreign
material.
Compact backfill firmly.
SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION
A.
Thickness:
1.
2.
B.
C.
Expansion Joints: Place in adjacent curb, where sidewalk ends at curb, and
around posts, poles, or other objects penetrating sidewalk. Install expansion
joint filler at each joint.
D.
Contraction Joints:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 32 91 13
SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
B.
PART 2
2.01
Informational Submittals:
1.
1.03
TOPSOIL
A.
General: Natural, friable, sandy loam, obtained from well-drained areas, free
from objects larger than 1-1/2 inches maximum dimension, and free of
subsoil, roots, grass, other foreign matter, hazardous or toxic substances, and
deleterious material that may be harmful to plant growth or may hinder
grading, planting, or maintenance.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 1
B.
2.02
LIME
A.
Composition: Ground limestone with not less than 85 percent total carbonates,
ASTM C602.
B.
Gradation:
1.
2.
3.
2.03
SOIL ADDITIVES
A.
B.
Peat:
1.
C.
Fertilizer:
1.
Natural:
a.
Manure:
1)
Well-rotted, stable or cattle manure, free from weed seed
and refuse.
2)
Maximum 50 percent sawdust or shavings by volume.
3)
Age: Minimum 4 months; maximum 2 years.
SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
D.
2.04
PART 3
3.02
3.01
Commercial:
a.
Commercial, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for
application with equipment designed for that purpose.
b.
Contain the following minimum percentage of plant food by
weight:
1)
Summer Mix:
a)
Nitrogen: 20 percent.
b)
Phosphoric Acid: 10 percent.
c)
Potash: 10 percent.
2)
Winter Mix:
a)
Nitrogen: 16 percent.
b)
Phosphoric Acid: 8 percent.
c)
Potash: 0 percent.
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.
Apply lime at the rate of 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet to subgrade before
tilling.
B.
C.
Remove stones over 2-1/2 inches in any dimension, sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous material.
D.
Limit preparation to areas which will receive topsoil within 2 days after
preparation.
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
A.
B.
Mix soil amendments, lime, and other soil additives, identified in analysis
reports with topsoil before placement or spread on topsoil surface and mix
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 3
Uniformly distribute to within 1/2 inch of final grades. Fine grade topsoil
eliminating rough or low areas and maintaining levels, profiles, and contours
of subgrade.
D.
E.
Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from Site. Grade stockpile area as
necessary and place in condition acceptable for planting or seeding.
END OF SECTION
SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 32 92 00
TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
Seed:
1.
2.
B.
Sod:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.04
Do not harvest if sod is excessively dry or wet to the extent survival may
be adversely affected.
Harvest and deliver sod only after laying bed is prepared for sodding.
Roll or stack to prevent yellowing.
Deliver and lay within 24 hours of harvesting.
Keep moist and covered to protect from drying from time of harvesting
until laid.
Hydroseeding Mulch: Mark package of wood fiber mulch to show air dry
weight.
WEATHER RESTRICTIONS
A.
1.05
Furnish in standard containers with seed name, lot number, net weight,
percentages of purity, germination, and hard seed and maximum weed
seed content, clearly marked for each container of seed.
Keep dry during storage.
B.
Complete Work under this section within 10 days following completion of soil
preparation.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.06
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
FERTILIZER
A.
B.
C.
Mix:
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.02
Nitrogen: 10.
Phosphoric Acid: 10.
Potash: 10.
SEED
A.
Fresh, clean new-crop seed that complies with the tolerance for purity and
germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
D.
2.03
30%
30%
25%
15%
SOD
A.
Strongly rooted pads, capable of supporting own weight and retaining size and
shape when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on upper 10 percent of
pad.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.04
Species
HYDROSEEDING MULCH
A.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A.
Grade areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.
1.
2.
3.
3.02
3.03
Roll and rake, remove ridges, fill depressions to meet finish grades.
Limit such Work to areas to be planted within immediate future.
Remove debris, and stones larger than 1-1/2-inch diameter, and other
objects that may interfere with planting and maintenance operations.
B.
Moisten prepared areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface to dry off before seeding. Do not create muddy soil.
C.
FERTILIZER
A.
B.
SEEDING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Hydroseeding:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
3.04
E.
Mulching: Apply uniform cover of wood fiber mulch at rate of 1,500 pounds
per acre.
F.
Water: Apply with fine spray after mulching to saturate top 4 inches of soil.
SODDING
A.
B.
Lay sod to form solid mass with tightly fitted joints; butt ends and sides, do
not overlap.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.05
C.
Water sod with fine spray immediately after planting. During first week, water
daily or more frequently to maintain moist soil to depth of 4 inches.
D.
B.
If a satisfactory stand has not been established, Engineer will make another
determination after written notice from Contractor following the next growing
season.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 33 05 01.01
WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
7.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
Fittings: Including, but not limited to fittings, closure pieces, bends, reducers,
tees, wyes, bifurcations, crosses, outlets, manifolds, nozzles, wall sleeves,
bulkheads, and other piping and appurtenances fabricated from steel plate,
sheet, or coils as required to provide the Work, complete. Fittings shall
include piping above ground or inside structures.
B.
Acronyms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.03
Lloyds Registry.
Steel Pipe Fabricators Association (SFPA).
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
1.04
PQRs conducted on unlisted base metal (most coil products are unlisted
base metals) to be production welded as required in the referenced
welding Code shall be traceable to heat lots.
Written WPS required for welds, both shop and field.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.05
Statements of Qualification:
a.
Contractors Shop Inspector.
b.
Contractors Field Inspector.
Procedures:
a.
Shop and field welding information; at a minimum include
complete welding code paper trail with linkage to Shop Drawings.
b.
Welder Qualifications and Welding Procedure Specifications in
accordance with Section 05 05 23, Welding, and as specified
below:
1)
Provide complete joint dimensions and details showing
bevels, groove angles, root face, and root openings for all
welds.
2)
Written NDT procedures.
c.
Written weld repair procedures for the Work.
d.
Field coating application and repair.
e.
Field lining application and repair.
Reports:
a.
Field Quality Control Test Reports:
1)
Weld tests, including re-examination of repaired welds, on
each weld joint for the following tests, as applicable:
a)
RT.
b)
UT.
b.
Cement-mortar lining compressive strength tests in accordance
with AWWA C205.
Field Testing Plan: Submit at least 15 days prior to testing and include
following information at a minimum:
a.
Testing dates.
b.
Piping system and sections to be tested.
c.
Method of isolation.
d.
Method of conveying water from source to system being tested.
e.
Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping sections to
be tested.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.06
Delivery:
1.
2.
3.
B.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
GENERAL
A.
Pipe Size and Wall Thickness: ASTM A106, Grade B, standard weight.
B.
FITTINGS
A.
Fabrication:
1.
2.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
JOINTS
A.
Shop Welded:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.04
EPOXY COATING
A.
2.06
FLANGES
A.
2.05
CEMENT-MORTAR LINING
A.
Shop-Applied:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.02
3.03
WELDING
A.
B.
C.
Preheat and Interpass temperature requirements for unlisted base metals shall
be determined according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Annex XI Guideline on
Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat.
D.
Rejectable weld defects shall be repaired or redone, and retested until sound
weld metal has been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes.
3.04
Joints and related work for field assembly of fittings shall conform to
requirements for straight pipe, unless otherwise shown.
Inspect pipe and fittings before installation. Clean ends thoroughly,
remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.
Field Welding:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
4.
B.
Hydrostatic Testing:
1.
Pipeline:
a.
General:
1)
Notify Engineer in writing 5 days prior to testing. Perform
testing in presence of Engineer.
2)
Test newly installed pipelines. Using water as test medium,
pipes shall successfully pass a leakage test prior to
acceptance.
3)
Furnish testing equipment and perform tests in manner
satisfactory to Engineer.
4)
Isolate new pipelines that are connected to existing
pipelines.
5)
Supply of temporary water shall be as stated in
Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls.
6)
Dispose of water used in testing in accordance with federal,
state, and local requirements.
b.
Preconditiong of cement-motar-lined pipe:
1)
Maximum filling velocity shall not exceed 0.25 foot per
second, calculated based on the full area of pipe.
2)
Expel air from pipe system during filling. Expel air through
corporation stop installed at high points and other strategic
points.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3)
4)
c.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 33 05 13
MANHOLES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 1
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
Experience Record:
a.
Precast concrete production capabilities.
b.
Evidence of current PCI plant certification.
Manufacturers recommended installation instructions.
Field quality control report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
2.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
3.
4.
B.
Structures shall meet requirements of ASTM C478, this specification and the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Concrete:
a.
Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M.
b.
Compressive Strength:
1)
Minimum 4,000 psi.
2)
Minimum strength shall be confirmed at 7 days by making
two standard cylinders per manhole for testing.
c.
Concrete mix design shall include Xypex C-500 or C-1000 based
upon mix design at dosage recommended by manufacturer for
installation.
Reinforcement: Grade 60, unless otherwise specified.
Ring: Custom made with openings to meet indicated pipe alignment
conditions and invert elevations.
Floor: Minimum 6 inches below pipe to provide clearance for grouting
channels.
Joint:
a.
Form joint contact services with machined castings.
b.
Surfaces shall be parallel with nominal 1/16-inch clearing and
tongue equipped with recess for installation of O-ring rubber
gasket.
Gasket: Meet requirements of ASTM C443.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 3
2.02
PRECAST MANHOLES
A.
Riser Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Cone Sections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 4
Manhole Extensions:
1.
2.
E.
Eccentric.
Same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser section.
Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel.
D.
Butyl Gaskets:
a.
Hamilton Kent, Sparks, NV; Kent-Seal No. 2.
b.
Trelleborg Engineered Solutions, Park Hills, MO; NPC Bidco
C-56.
Confined Plastic or Rubber O-Ring:
a.
As recommended by precasting manufacturer.
b.
Meet requirements of ASTM C443.
External Wrap:
a.
Sealing Systems, Inc., Loretto, MN; Gator Wrap.
b.
Henry Company, Houston, TX; RU116 Rubr-Nek External Joint
Wrap.
c.
Trelleborg Engineered Solutions, Park Hills, MO; NPC External
Joint Wrap.
d.
Cretex Specialty Products, Waukesha, WI; Cretex Wrap.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
Polypropylene Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.03
2.04
CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLES
A.
B.
Castings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.05
Tough, close-grained gray iron, sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters,
blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and defects.
Cast Iron: ASTM A48/A48M Class 30B.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-12.
Plane or grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces.
Butyl Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 5
B.
External Wrap:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.06
MORTAR
A.
B.
C.
Mix Consistency:
1.
2.
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.07
2.08
2.09
B.
Concrete Testing: Test two concrete test cylinders for each manhole.
Compressive strength shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M,
ASTM C39/C39M, and ASTM C192/C192M.
C.
Inspection:
1.
2.
Material Quality:
a.
Manufacturing process and finished sections shall be subject to
inspection and approval by Owner and Engineer.
1)
Inspections may take place at manufacturers plant, at Site
after delivery, or at both.
2)
Sections not meeting requirements of this Specification or
that are determined to have defects which may affect
durability of structure are subject to rejection.
3)
Sections rejected after delivery shall be removed and
replaced.
4)
Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if
already installed shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner
and Engineer.
5)
If structure cannot be repaired it shall be removed and
replaced entirely at Contractors expense.
At the time of inspection the sections will be carefully examined for
compliance with ASTM C478 and with manufacturers Drawings.
Sections will be inspected for general appearance, dimensions, scratch
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 7
3.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
2.
3.
B.
3.02
3.03
B.
Concrete Base:
1.
2.
B.
Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 8
Precast:
a.
Place on compacted structural fill.
b.
Properly locate, ensure firm bearing throughout, and plumb first
section.
Cast-in-Place:
a.
Invert: Minimum 8 inches below lowest connecting pipe.
b.
First section of manhole shall be cast in concrete base.
C.
D.
E.
Extensions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.04
3.05
3.06
MANHOLE INVERT
A.
B.
Where full section of pipe is laid through manhole, break out top section and
cover exposed edge of pipe completely with mortar. Trowel mortar surfaces
smooth.
Install concrete grade rings as required to set covers flush with surface of
adjoining pavement or ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed.
B.
Set frames in three equally spaced beads of butyl sealant that run full
circumference of frame.
C.
D.
CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLE
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 9
C.
Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.07
MANHOLE PIPING
A.
B.
Flexible Joints:
1.
2.
3.08
Provide in pipe not more than 1-1/2 feet from manhole walls.
Where last joint of pipe is between 1-1/2 feet and 6 feet from manhole
wall, provide flexible joint in manhole wall.
B.
C.
D.
E.
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.09
3.10
F.
G.
H.
Saw cut out or demolish existing pipe within new manhole using method
approved by Engineer.
I.
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 11
SECTION 33 46 16
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
This section covers the Work necessary for the underdrain system.
REFERENCES
A.
2.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
UNDERDRAIN PIPE
A.
B.
All fittings and couplings shall be as specifically manufactured for the pipe.
Perforated pipe shall be joined by split couplings with gaskets conforming to
AASHTO M 252. Solid pipe shall be joined by double bell watertight joints
which meet the requirements of ASTM F1336, except that the inside
dimensions of the bells shall match the outside dimensions of the pipe.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 1
2.02
D.
E.
MANHOLES
A.
2.03
PART 3
3.01
PREPARATION OF TRENCH
A.
B.
Removal of Water: At all times, provide and maintain ample means and
devices to remove and dispose of water entering the trench during the laying
operation to the extent required to properly grade the bottom of the trench and
allow for proper compaction of the backfill in the pipe zone. Do not lay pipe
in water.
C.
Preparation of Pipe Prior to Installation: Inspect all pipe and fittings before
lowering into the prepared trench to ensure that no cracked, broken, or
defective pipe or fittings are being used in the Work. Clean the ends of the
pipe thoroughly. Remove foreign matter and dirt from the inside of the pipe.
Ensure that the inside surfaces are smooth and free from any projections
which would interfere with the assembly or watertightness of the joint.
D.
Handling: Provide and use proper implements, tools, and facilities for the safe
and proper protection of the Work. Lower all pipe into the trench in such a
manner as to avoid any physical damage to the pipe. Reject all damaged pipe
and remove from the Job Site. Do not drop or dump pipe into the trench under
any circumstances.
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
3.02
3.03
Line and Grade: Maximum deviation from true line or grade, as established by
the Engineer, shall not exceed 1/2-inch for line and 1/4-inch for grade
provided that such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert.
The locations of the slotted underdrain are shown. Bring the subgrade to the
final elevation, dig trenches, and place geotextile as specified in
Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextiles. Bring Granular Drain Material to the level
of the bottom of pipe, and lay the slotted pipe on a true alignment in the
prepared trench as shown. Face joints in direction opposite of flow if
interlocking joints are used. Orient so that two slots face down.
B.
After a section of pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench, wipe the end
of the pipe to be joined and the inside of the joint clean immediately before
joining the pipe. Make the joint in strict accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer. Provide all special tools and appliances required for the
jointing assembly.
C.
D.
Prevent soil or other foreign material and debris from getting into the pipe
during the laying operation. At all times when laying operations are not in
progress, at the close of the days work or during periods of inactivity, close
and block the open end of the last laid section of pipe to prevent entry of
foreign material or creep of the gasketed joints.
BACKFILLING
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 3
3.04
CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES
A.
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 33 66 16
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) WALLS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Supply all labor, tools, equipment, and materials to design and construct a
28-inch reinforced mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) wall.
B.
The Drawings illustrate the plan and elevation views for the MSE walls,
including straight and curvilinear alignments. The section views are shown in
concept only.
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 1
1.03
1.04
Check the materials upon delivery to assure proper material has been received.
B.
Prevent excessive mud, wet cement, and like materials from coming in contact
with the units.
C.
Protect the materials from damage. Damaged and rejected material rejected by
the Engineer shall be removed from the Project.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Sample of block.
C.
D.
E.
Product data.
F.
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Wall Backfill Material: Test reports and records including gradation, PI, LL,
and standard Proctor curve. Test shall be performed in accordance with
applicable ASTM standards and specifications.
I.
Geogrid:
1.
2.
Material.
Manufacturers installation instructions.
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
CEMENT
A.
2.02
2.03
2.04
AGGREGATE
A.
B.
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the provisions of ASTM C33 except that all
aggregate shall be crushed aggregate. Screened aggregate is unacceptable.
WATER
A.
Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis,
salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to
concrete or steel.
B.
Water for mixing concrete shall conform to ASTM C1602 and ASTM C1603.
C.
ADMIXTURES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Purpose
Water Reducing
Retarding
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 3
Type
C.
2.
Accelerating
The concrete mix shall meet the properties and characteristics specified in this
Specification and in Section 033000, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B.
2.06
Air Entrainment:
1.
2.05
Purpose
WALL UNITS
A.
B.
All material used in the wall units must meet applicable and referenced ASTM
and Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Tolerances:
1.
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
2.07
D.
E.
Dime-size bug holes on the block face may be patched and/or shake-on color
stain can be used to blend into the remainder of the block face.
GEOGRID
A.
2.08
2.11
FREE-DRAINING BACKFILL
A.
2.10
LEVELING PAD
A.
2.09
B.
Unsuitable soils with a PL>6, organic soils and frost susceptible soils shall not
be used within a one to one influence area.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 5
B.
C.
Corrosion resistant uncoated steel shall be low carbon, chromium bar with a
minimum of 8.5 percent by weight chromium meeting all requirements of
ASTM A615 Grade 75.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
EXECUTION
EXCAVATION
A.
B.
B.
Insitu foundation soil shall be examined by the Engineer to determine that the
actual foundation soil strength meets or exceeds assumed design strength.
C.
Remove and replace soil that fails to meet the required strength with
acceptable, compacted material.
B.
C.
For steps and pavers, a minimum of 1-inch to 1-1/2-inch of free draining sand
shall be screeded smooth to act as a placement bed for the steps or pavers.
UNIT INSTALLATION
A.
The first course of wall units shall be placed on the prepared leveling pad with
the aesthetic surface facing out and the front edges tight together. All units
shall be checked for level and alignment as they are placed.
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.05
B.
Confirm that units are in full contact with leveling pad. Proper care shall be
taken to develop straight lines and smooth curves on base course in
accordance with the wall layout shown in the Drawings.
C.
Backfill in front and back of entire base row shall be placed and compacted to
firmly lock them in place. Check all units again for level and alignment.
Sweep any excess backfill material from top of units.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Spread backfill in uniform lifts not exceeding 9 inches. Employ methods using
compaction equipment that will affect the stability or batter of the wall. Handoperated plate compaction equipment shall be used around the block and
within 3 feet of the wall to achieve consolidation. Compact backfill to
95 percent of standard proctor (ASTM D698) density within 2 percent of its
optimum moisture content.
I.
Install each subsequent course in like manner. Repeat procedure to the extent
of wall height.
J.
K.
Curves shall be made with a minimum 14-foot 6-inch radius at the wall face.
GEOGRID INSTALLATION
A.
3.06
STAINING
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 7
SECTION 35 20 16.25
FABRICATED SLIDE GATES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
1.02
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
Slenderness Ratio: The ratio of the maximum unsupported stem length to the
stem cross-section radius of gyration.
C.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Coordinate such that electric motor operators are fully assembled and tested,
including motor, at the factory.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
Item
B.
PART 2
2.01
Indicator lights
One dozen
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Stainless Steel:
1.
2.
2.03
Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316L or Type 304L.
Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L or Type 304L.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.04
Quantity
Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per minute per foot of gate periphery
under either seating or unseating head conditions.
SLIDE GATES
A.
Style A: Upward acting type for wall surface mounting on the concrete
structures.
Style B: Upward acting type for mounting in channels with concrete
embedded frame and invert.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
B.
Guide Frames:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Stainless steel.
Vertical Guides: Design for maximum rigidity, and extend in one
continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for support of gate
operators of self-contained gates. When guides extended above the
operating floor, they shall be sufficiently strong so that no further
reinforcements are required.
a.
Weight: Not less than 9 pounds per linear foot.
b.
Incorporate a replaceable UHMW polyethylene bearing strip in a
retainer slot on the downstream side (unseating head side) of the
gate.
Frame Invert: For flush bottom gate, furnish a neoprene insert to
function as a seating surface for the gate disc.
a.
Weight: Not less than 9 pounds per linear foot.
Join vertical guide frames and invert with factory welded corners.
Size guided slot to provide a minimum disc engagement of 1 inch on
each side.
Wall Thimbles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Disc:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
F.
Stems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Stem Covers:
1.
2.
H.
Manufacturers:
1.
Stainless Steel:
a.
Whipps, Inc.
b.
Hydro Gate Corp.
c.
Rodney Hunt Co.
d.
H. Fontaine, Ltd.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
GATE OPERATORS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
C.
Direct drive.
Sealed, ball thrust, roller or needle bearing type and equipped with
bronze lift nut, internally threaded with Acme threads.
Furnish mechanical seals at housing penetrations.
Handwheel and Baseplate: Cast iron or cast aluminum.
Manual Effort: Not to exceed 40 pounds.
2.
3.
4.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
E.
F.
2.
For each gate operator, 1-1/2-inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag,
bearing the gate tag number shown in the schedule.
Attach the tags to the operator by soldered split key rings to that ring
and tag cannot be removed. Use block type numbers and letters with
1/4-inch minimum high numbers and letters stamped on and filled with
black enamel.
APPURTENANCES
A.
B.
C.
Staff Gauges: For stainless steel, downward acting weir gates. Graduated in
1/4 inches and marked every inch and foot.
1.
2.07
2.06
SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete with unthinned bitumastic
paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, or insulate
with suitable protective neoprene gasket material.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
B.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.03
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Assembly
Style
Wall Opening
(width/height inches)
Thimble
Type
Material
Seating/Unseating
Condition
Operator Type
AER-GTE-P-30781
Mixed Liquor Transfer Pump Station
20-inch diameter
F x MJ
Stainless Steel
10/7
Type 4
AER-GTE-P-30835
Aeration Basin 5
24-inch diameter
F x MJ
Stainless Steel
11/9
Type 4
AER-GTE-P-30836
24-inch diameter
F x MJ
Stainless Steel
11/9
Type 4
HDW-GTE-P-20311
Headworks
54-inch by 120-inch
N/A
Stainless Steel
12/6
Type 4
HDW-GTE-P-20312 *
Headworks
54-inch by 120-inch
N/A
Stainless Steel
12/6
Type 4
HDW-GTE-P-20313 **
Headworks
54-inch by 120-inch
N/A
Stainless Steel
12/6
Type 4
THK-GTE-P-71111
Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks
6-inch by 6- inch
N/A
Type 316
Stainless Steel
21/20.5
Type 4
THK-GTE-P-71112
Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks
6-inch by 6- inch
N/A
Type 316
Stainless Steel
21/20.5
Type 4
THK-GTE-P-71081
Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks
6-inch by 6- inch
N/A
Type 316
Stainless Steel
20.5/20.5
Type 4
WSR-GTE-P-64061
WAS Phosphate Release Facility
42-inch by 42-inch
N/A
Stainless Steel
3/3
Type 4
WSR-GTE-P-64062
WAS Phosphate Release Facility
42-inch by 42-inch
N/A
Stainless Steel
3/3
Type 4
Aeration Basin 6
* Formerly HDW-GTE-P-20311. Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with type specified.
** Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with type specified.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 05 15
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.05
support, hanger, guide, and anchor type by catalog number and Shop
Drawing detail number.
Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor.
Revisions to support systems resulting from changes in related piping
system layout or addition of flexible joints.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Piping support systems shall be designed and Shop Drawings prepared and
sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the state of Idaho.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.
Design pipe support systems for gravity and thrust loads imposed by
weight of pipes or internal pressures, including insulation and weight of
fluid in pipes.
Seismic loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on
Structural General Drawings.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
C.
D.
E.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of correct
material and to general configuration indicated.
B.
Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard
catalog supports are not applicable.
C.
HANGERS
A.
Anvil; Figure 260 for steel pipe and Figure 590 for ductile-iron pipe,
sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.
Insulated Steel Pipe: Anvil; Figure 260 with insulated saddle system
(ISS), sizes 1/2 inch through 16 inches.
B-Line; Figure B3100, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
C.
Steel Yoke Pipe Rolls and Roller Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 41 or Type 43:
1.
2.
D.
B.
C.
Offset Pipe Clamp: Anvil; Figure 103, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.
D.
Channel Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
Anvil; Figure 181 for sizes 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches, and
Figure 171 for sizes 1 inch through 30 inches.
B-Line; Figure B3110 for sizes 2 inches through 24 inches and
Figure B3114 for 30 inches.
2.03
Unistrut.
Anvil; Power-Strut.
B-Line; Strut System.
Aickinstrut (FRP).
PIPE SADDLES
A.
Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe saddle for pipe 6 inches and larger with
baseplates drilled for anchors bolts.
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
3.
2.05
B.
C.
Fasteners: Vinyl ester fiber, polyurethane base composite nuts and bolts, or
encapsulated steel fasteners.
D.
2.06
General:
1.
2.
3.
FRP with UV additive, protective veil, and vinyl ester resins resistance
to chemicals listed in Supplement at end of section.
Fire Retardant: ASTM E84.
Include hangers, rods, attachments, and fasteners.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Clevis Hangers:
1.
2.
C.
Design:
1.
2.
D.
2.09
Aickinstrut.
Enduro.
Century Composite.
PIPE CLAMPS
A.
2.08
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.07
Factor of Safety: 3 to 1.
Minimum Design Load: 200 pounds.
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
2.10
Type: Spider.
B.
2.11
2.12
PIPE ANCHORS
A.
B.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A.
Solid pipe bracing attachment to pipe clevis with clevis cross brace and angle
rod reinforcement.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.13
Mason Industries.
B-Line.
Anvil.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchor Bolts:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Dielectric Barriers:
1.
2.
C.
Insulation Shields:
1.
2.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, Type 28,
Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange.
Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with
load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports.
Welded Beam Attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.
a.
Anvil; Figure 66.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3083.
U-Channel Concrete Inserts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
Concrete Attachment Plates:
a.
Anvil; Figure 47, Figure 49, or Figure 52.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3084, Figure B3085, or Figure B3086.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2)
Provide minimum 1-1/2-inch grout beneath baseplate.
Floor Mounted Channel Supports:
1)
Use for pipe smaller than 3-inch running along floors and in
trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated
using pedestal pipe supports.
2)
Attach channel framing to floors with baseplate on
minimum 1-1/2-inch nonshrink grout and with anchor bolts.
3)
Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps.
c.
Concrete Cradles: Use for pipe larger than 3 inches along floor
and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be
accommodated using stanchion type.
Insulated Pipe:
a.
Pipe hanger and support shall be on outside of insulation. Do not
enclose within insulation.
b.
Provide precut 120-degree sections of rigid insulation (minimum
length same as shield), shields and oversized hangers or insulated
saddle system (ISS).
c.
Wall-mounted pipe clips not acceptable for insulated piping.
Vertical Pipe: Support with wall bracket and elbow support, or riser
clamp on floor penetration.
b.
4.
5.
C.
Standard Attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
D.
E.
F.
2.
3.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
Accessories:
1.
3.02
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Table 1
Nonchemical Areas
Exposure Conditions
Support Material
Office Areas
Pipe Galleries
Notes:
1. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol).
2. Stainless steel to be Type 316.
3. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M.
4. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these
surfaces.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Table 2
Chemical Areas
Support for Direct
Exposure
Exposure Conditions
Coagulants (Polymer)
FRP
Ferric Chloride
FRP
Precoated steel
Notes:
1. Direct exposure includes entire area within containment area; area within 20 feet
horizontal and 10 feet vertical of chemical pumps or chemical mixing stations; or as
specified.
2. Remote exposure is area beyond area defined as direct exposure, but within designated
building.
3. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol).
4. Stainless steel to be Type 316.
5. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M.
6. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these
surfaces.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 05 33
PIPE HEAT TRACING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.
2.02
Factory Mutual.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics engineers, Inc (IEEE): 515,
Testing, Design, Installation and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance
Heat Tracing for Industrial Applications.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
parallel copper bus wires. Provide tinned copper braid for PVC, FRP, and
stainless steel pipe applications.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.03
Raychem; BTV-CR.
Thermon; BSX.
Nelson; CL1-J1 or L1-J1.
CONNECTION SYSTEM
A.
B.
Operating Monitor Light: Furnish with each circuit power connection kit to
indicate when heat tracing is energized.
C.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
2.04
SECURING TAPE
A.
B.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.06
2.05
AMBIENT THERMOSTAT
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Item
Bolted flanges (per pair)
Valves
C.
Heat Tracing Circuits: Limit individual lengths of heat tracing circuits such
that maximum single circuit capacity is 20 amps when starting the circuit at
40 degrees F. Provide multiple 20-amp circuits as required at individual heat
tracing locations.
D.
Thermostats:
1.
2.
3.02
Test each circuit with 500-volt insulation tester between circuit and ground
with neutrals isolated from ground.
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 1
5.
6.
7.
8.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 3
dd.
A743/A743M, Standard Specification for Castings, IronChromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for
General Application.
ee. A744/A744M, Standard Specification for Castings, IronChromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service.
ff. A774/A774M, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought
Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at
Low and Moderate Temperatures.
gg. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubular Products.
hh. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
ii.
B43, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe,
Standard Sizes.
jj.
B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
kk. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
ll.
B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
mm. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
nn. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,
Bar and Shapes.
oo. B462, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030,
UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS
N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS
N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS
N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, and UNS
R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts
for Corrosive High-Temperature Service.
pp. B464, Standard Specification for Welded UNS N08020, N08024,
and N08026 Alloy Pipe.
qq. B474, Standard Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Pipe.
rr. C582, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced
Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment.
ss. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension.
tt.
D413, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property Adhesion to
Flexible Substrate.
uu. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics
to Chemical Reagents.
vv. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable.
ww. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
xx.
yy.
zz.
aaa.
bbb.
ccc.
ddd.
eee.
fff.
ggg.
hhh.
iii.
jjj.
kkk.
lll.
mmm.
nnn.
ooo.
ppp.
qqq.
rrr.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 5
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
Submerged or Wetted:
1.
1.03
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
1.04
Thrust Restraints:
a.
Design for test pressure shown in Piping Schedule.
b.
Above grade piping shall utilize inherently restrained or
mechanically restrained joints.
c.
Only restrained joint piping shall be utilized in below grade
applications.
d.
Concrete thrust blocking is not permitted for buried pressure
piping.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 7
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
1.06
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
PIPING
A.
As specified on Piping Data Sheet(s) and Piping Schedule located at the end
of this section as Supplement.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Diameters Shown:
1.
2.
3.
2.02
JOINTS
A.
B.
Rigid type.
Use of flexible grooved joints will only be allowed where shown on
Drawings or with prior approval by Engineer.
Flanges: When required, furnish with grooved type flange adapters of
same manufacturer as grooved end couplings.
Flanged Joints:
1.
2.
C.
Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.
D.
E.
F.
Ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with breakoff tightening bolts.
Thrust rated to 250 psi minimum.
Rated operating deflection not less than 2-1/2 degrees.
UL and FM approved.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 9
2.
3.
4.
G.
2.03
GASKET LUBRICANT
A.
2.04
Lubricant shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer and no substitute or orequal will be allowed.
Coatings: See Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for details of coating
requirements.
B.
C.
2.
D.
Materials:
a.
In accordance with applicable piping material specified in Pipe
Data Sheet. Complete assembly shall have ASME B31.3 working
pressure rating equal to or higher than that of joint and pipeline.
b.
Galvanically compatible with piping.
c.
Resistant for intended exposure, operating temperatures, and
products in pipeline.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.05
2.06
THRUST TIES
A.
Steel Pipe: Fabricated lugs and rods in accordance with details shown on
Drawings.
B.
Buried Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Unless restraint is otherwise specified
or shown, conform to NFPA 24. Tie-rod attachments relying on clamp friction
with pipe barrel to restrain thrust are unacceptable.
Pipeline 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless
shown otherwise.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 11
B.
2.07
Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless
shown otherwise.
FABRICATION
A.
2.08
B.
C.
Flanged pipe shall be fabricated in the shop, not in the field, and delivered to
the Site with flanges in place and properly faced. Threaded flanges shall be
individually fitted and machine tightened on matching threaded pipe by the
manufacturer.
FINISHES
A.
Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Pipe Data Sheet(s)
and Piping Schedule.
B.
Galvanizing:
1.
2.
3.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe
service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new
equipment.
B.
C.
Welding Electrodes: Verify proper grade and type, free of moisture and
dampness, and coating is undamaged.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 12
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
3.03
PREPARATION
A.
See Piping Schedule and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for
additional requirements.
B.
C.
Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and
remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.
D.
Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using original coating and lining
materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions, except for damaged
glass-lined pipe that is to be promptly removed from the Site.
WELDING
A.
Perform in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code and ASME B31.1 for Pressure Piping, as may be specified on Piping
Data Sheets, and if recommended by piping or fitting manufacturer.
B.
C.
D.
Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Clean and free of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, or other material
detrimental to welding.
Clean stainless steel joints with stainless steel wire brushes or stainless
steel wool prior to welding. Carbon steel brushes and tools shall not be
used on stainless surfaces.
Thoroughly clean each layer of deposited weld metal, including final
pass, prior to deposition of each additional layer of weld metal with a
power-driven wire brush.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 13
3.
F.
Climatic Conditions:
1.
2.
3.04
G.
H.
I.
J.
INSTALLATIONGENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Flanged Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 14
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
E.
Grooved-End Joints:
1.
2.
F.
Soldered Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
H.
PVC:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 15
2.
3.
I.
J.
6.
7.
3.05
Cutting Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or
abrasive blade cutter. Do not flame cut.
Dressing Cut Ends:
a.
General: As required for the type of joint to be made.
b.
Rubber Gasketed Joints: Remove sharp edges or projections.
c.
Push-On Joints: Bevel, as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
d.
Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters, and Grooved End
Pipe Couplings: As recommended by the coupling or adapter
manufacturer.
K.
INSTALLATIONEXPOSED PIPING
A.
Piping Runs:
1.
2.
B.
C.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 16
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
E.
F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.06
INSTALLATIONBURIED PIPE
A.
Joints:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 17
B.
Placement:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C.
Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed.
Pipe Base and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench
Backfill.
Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or
damage to pipe.
Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe.
Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual
inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection.
Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.
Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement
operations are not in progress and at close of days Work.
Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying.
Install closure sections and adapters for gravity piping at locations where
pipe laying changes direction.
Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical
closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths
will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment,
provide:
a.
Shorter pipe lengths.
b.
Special mitered joints.
c.
Standard or special fabricated bends.
After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade.
Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before
next joint is installed.
Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.
Gravity Applications: Plug or close off pipes that are stubbed off for
manhole, concrete structure, or for connection by others, with temporary
watertight plugs.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 18
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
E.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.07
3.08
INSTALLATIONCONCRETE ENCASED
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 19
B.
Copper Pipe:
1.
2.
C.
D.
Piping Accessories:
1.
2.
Exposed:
a.
Field paint black and galvanized steel, brass, copper, and bronze
piping components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, as applicable to base metal material.
b.
Accessories include, but are not limited to, pipe hangers, supports,
expansion joints, pipe guides, flexible couplings, vent and drain
valves, and fasteners.
Buried:
a.
Ferrous Metal and Stainless Steel Components: Coat with coal-tar
epoxy as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b.
Bolts, Nuts, and Similar Items: Coat with bituminous paint.
c.
Flexible Couplings, Grooved Couplings, and Similar Items: Wrap
with heat shrink wrap.
d.
Buried Valves and Similar Elements on Wrapped Pipelines: Coat
with bituminous paint and wrap entire valve in polyethylene
encasement.
e.
Cement-Coated Pipelines: Cement coat appurtenances same as
pipe.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.
Applications:
a.
Dissimilar metal piping connections.
b.
Cathodically protected piping penetration to watertight structures.
c.
Where required for electrically insulated connection.
Pipe Installation:
a.
Insulating joints connecting immersed piping to nonimmersed
piping shall be installed above maximum water surface elevation.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 20
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
3.09
I.
J.
THRUST RESTRAINT
A.
Location:
1.
2.
B.
2.
3.
C.
Thrust Ties:
1.
3.10
Steel Pipe: Attach with lugs fabricated in accordance with details shown
on Drawings.
Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with socket clamps anchored against a
grooved joint coupling or flange.
Flanged Coupling Adapters: For exposed installations, install
manufacturers anchor studs through the coupling sleeve or use
dismantling joints.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 21
3.11
BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A.
Do not install branch connections smaller than 1/2-inch nominal pipe size,
including instrument connections, unless shown otherwise.
B.
C.
3.12
3.13
3.16
HEAT TRACING
A.
3.15
Vents and drains at high and low points in piping required for completed
system may or may not be shown. Install vents on high points and drains on
low points of pipelines at all low and high point locations.
INSULATION
A.
3.14
FIELD FINISHING
A.
B.
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 22
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.17
3.18
CLEANING
A.
Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines
(except as stated below) with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until
foreign matter is removed.
B.
Blow instrument air lines clean of loose debris with compressed air
at 4,000 fpm; do not flush with water.
C.
If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps or blow at 4,000 fpm
velocity, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or
blow line at lower velocity.
D.
E.
F.
Gravity Applications:
1.
2.
3.19
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification:
1.
2.
Piping Schedule.
Data Sheets.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 23
Number
Title
40 27 00.01
40 27 00.02
40 27 00.03
40 27 00.04
40 27 00.07
40 27 00.08
40 27 00.10
40 27 00.13
40 27 00.21
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 24
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
All
BUR
Buried
EXP
SUB
Submerged
ENC
Concrete Encased
MATERIAL
CLDI
CLWS
CISP
COP
Copper
DI
Ductile Iron
FRP
GLDI
GSP
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
PWPE
SST
Stainless Steel
STL
Steel
WS
JOINT TYPE
FLG
Flanged
GR
Grooved
HS
HU
Hubless
PRJ
MJ
Screwed
SL
Soldered
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1
SW
Socket Welded
PRESSURE TEST
G
Hydrostatic
In Service
Pneumatic
PC
NA
Not Applicable
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Piping Schedule
Service
AIR, HIGH PRESS.
Legend
AHP
Size(s)
(In.)1
ALL
Exposure
ALL
Piping
Material6
COP
Specification
Section
40 27 00.13
Joint
Type
SL
Coating2
Sys. #10
225, P
Remarks
MEDIUM GREEN
COMPRESSED AIR
THICKENED SLUDGE
TS
>=4
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
EXP
PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR
<4
EXP
SST
402700.08
FLG,S,
W
110, H
LIGHT BROWN
Sys. #5
CONDENSATE DRAIN
CO
ALL
ALL
CISP
40 27 00.02
HU
10 FT WC, H, PC
LIGHT BROWN
8,10
SS,V
ALL
ALL
CISP
40 27 00.02
HU
10 FT WC, H, PC
LIGHT BROWN
8,10
PROCESS DRAIN/Overflow
PD/OF
ALL
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
10 FT WC, H, PC
LIGHT BROWN
60, H
OSHA YELLOW
EXP
Overflow
OF
ALL
SUB
GLDI
40 27 00.01
FERROUS CHLORIDE
FC
<=1
EXP
PVC
TUBING
SEE
REMARKS
BUR
PVC
TUBING
SEE
REMARKS
PVC
CONDUIT
CONTAIN
MENT
26 05 33
(CONDUIT)
STL
40 27 00.03
EXP IN
UTILIDOR
HPHW
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
ALL
EXP
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
FLG,GR
Sys. #2
with
Ceramic
epoxy
DANGER FERROUS
CHLORIDE
SW
3000, H
OSHA GREEN
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1
Piping Schedule
Service
MIXED LIQUOR
Legend
ML
Size(s)
(In.)1
20,16,14
,10
Exposure
BUR
Piping
Material6
CLDI
Specification
Section
40 27 00.01
EXP
NATURAL GAS
MLR
NG
Joint
Type
PRJ,MJ
30, H
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
Sys. #5
42, 14
EXP
CLWS
33 05 01.01
W,FLG
ALL
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
ALL
Coating2
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
SUB
FL,GR
Sys. #2
Sys. #5
STL
40 27 00.04
Remarks
LIGHT BROWN
3
I
30, H
EXP
EXP
12
LIGHT BROWN
3
50, P
OSHA YELLOW
5,10
LABEL WHITE/
GREEN NATURAL
GAS
THICKENED PRIMARY SLUDGE
TPS
>=4
BUR
GLDI
40 27 00.01
EXP
PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
Sys. #2
with
Ceramic
epoxy
TPS
>=4
SUB
GLDI
40 27 00.01
FLG,GR
FERMENTED PRIMARY
SLUDGE
FPS
>=4
BUR
GLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
EXP
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE
PRIMARY SCUM
RAS
PSM
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2
FLG,GR
<=36
BUR
CLDI
<30
EXP
>=30
EXP
CLWS
>4
SUB
GLDI
40 27 00.01
150, H
LIGHT BROWN
150, H
150, H
LIGHT BROWN
30, H
LIGHT BROWN
Sys. #5
PRJ,MJ
FLG
Sys. #5
33 05 01.01
W,FLG
Sys, #5
40 27 00.01
FLG
Sys. #2
11
150, H
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Piping Schedule
Service
SECONDARY SCUM
Legend
SSM
Size(s)
(In.)1
ALL
Exposure
BUR
Piping
Material6
CLDI
Specification
Section
40 27 00.01
EXP
Joint
Type
Coating2
PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
ALL
BUR
PVC
40 27 00.10
HS
PRIMARY EFFLUENT
PE
ALL
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
25, H
LIGHT BROWN
100, H
BLUE
EXP
POTABLE WATER
W1
>=4
BUR
FLG,GR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
EXP
Sys. #5
PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
<4
ALL
COP
40 27 00.13
SL
HW
<4
ALL
COP
40 27 00.13
SL
100, H
FHW
<4
ALL
COP
40 27 00.13
SL
100, H
POLYMER SOLUTION
PO
ALL
ALL
PVC
40 27 00.10
VFA FILTRATE
VFLT
ALL
BUR
PVC
40 27 00.10
VFA FILTRATE
VFLT
>=4
EXP
CLDI
40 27 00.01
FLG,GR
<4
EXP
PVC
40 27 00.10
<4
ALL
PVC
40 27 00.10
>=4
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
HOT WATER
Remarks
P-RICH FILTRATE
PFLT
EXP
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
FLG,GR
Sys. #25
Sys. #5
150, H
LIGHT BROWN
150, H
LIGHT BROWN
150, H
LIGHT BROWN
3,16
3
Sys. #25
150, H
LIGHT BROWN
Sys. #5
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3
Piping Schedule
Service
NON-POTABLE WATER
Legend
W2
NON-POTABLE WATER
Size(s)
(In.)1
>=4
Exposure
BUR
Piping
Material6
CLDI
Specification
Section
40 27 00.01
EXP
<4
W3
>=4
W5
BUR / SUB
PVC
40 27 00.10
ALL OTHER
GSP
40 27 00.07
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR
BUR / SUB
PVC
40 27 00.10
ALL OTHER
GSP
40 27 00.07
ALL
ALL
SST
40 27 00.08
>=4
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
EXP
FOUL AIR
FA
WAS
CVS
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4
100, H
PURPLE (INSIDE)
Sys. #5
Sys. #5
LIGHT BROWN
(UTILIDOR)
Sys. #5
Sys. #5
9
100, H
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
40 27 00.07
Sys. #5
ALL
EXP
FRP
23 31 16.16
FLG, W
Sys. #25
EXP
SST
23 31 13
FLG
NA
BUR
PWPE
40 27 00.21
HS,FLG
NA
BUR
CLDI
40 27 00.01
PRJ,MJ
25, H
EXP
See Remarks
11 24 19
FLG,GR
Sys. #5
See
Remarks
Sys. #5
DARK BLUE
(INSIDE)
LIGHT BROWN
(UTILIDOR)
GSP
ALL
Remarks
BLUE
EXP
ALL
100, H
<4
EXP
Central Vacuum System
Coating2
PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR
EXP
<4
Joint
Type
NA
LIGHT BROWN
14
14
LIGHT BROWN
3
See Remarks
CVS
15
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Piping Schedule
Service
Legend
Size(s)
(In.)1
Exposure
Piping
Material6
Specification
Section
Joint
Type
Coating2
Remarks
Coating system number as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as specified in Article Pipe Corrosion Protection. Buried DI piping shall be polyethylene encased.
All outside piping, valves, and fittings shall be heat traced per Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing, and insulated per 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation. VFLT piping within the Aeration Basin 1 and 2
Division Structure shall be heat traced and insulated.
4
See Drawing notes for FC tubing specification. Use SCH 40 PVC conduit as containment pipe. Provide clear PVC drop leg as visual leak inspection port at multiple locations. See Civil Drawings for
requirement.
5
All below grade natural gas piping is not in contract and will be provided by local utilities.
Material shall be in accordance with the Piping Schedule except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Schedule 160 piping, socket-weld joints and fittings. All components to be rated for test pressure. Insulate.
4-inch and smaller drain piping that connects to larger than 4-inch drain piping shall be same pipe material as large drain piping. Exception: where larger drain piping is DI, smaller drain piping shall be GSP.
10
See Section 22 10 01, Plumbing Piping and Accessories, for additional requirements.
11
12
Cement-lined welded steel piping shall be used at the 14 inch transitioning from 42 inch inside the pipe gallery. See Drawings for location.
13
Unless otherwise noted in quotations, labels on all piping shall match the designation noted in the Service column.
14
FA piping outdoors shall be FRP. FA piping indoors shall be SST duct. Refer to Division 23 for additional requirements.
15
CVS piping is provided by the equipment vendor. Refer to Section 11 24 19, Central Vacuum System, for CVS piping Specification and additional requirements.
16
For DI piping carrying VFLT, provide ceramic epoxy lining in accordance with System #2 specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. Coal tar or high build epoxies are not an acceptable substitute
for ceramic epoxy lining.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 5
SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
General
Description
Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61
acceptance.
Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that source manufacturing
facility has been producing ductile iron pipe of the specified diameters,
dimensions, and standards for a period of not less than 10 years.
Testing of pipe required by AWWA A21.51 shall be conducted in
testing and laboratory facilities located in the USA and operating under
USA laws and regulations. Pipe shall be handled during manufacture
and shipped without nesting (without insertion of one pipe inside
another).
Pipe
Lining
Fittings
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 1
SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
Description
Proprietary Restrained: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11,
and AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working
pressure. Restraint shall be achieved with removable metal elements
fitted between a welded bar on the pipe barrel and the inside of the joint
bell or fitting sizes smaller than 16 inches may be mechanical joint,
restrained by anchor gland followers, ductile iron anchor type, wedge
action, with break-off tightening bolts. Assembled joints shall be rated
for deflection in operation at rated pressure. Rated deflection shall be
not less than 1-1/2 degrees for 36-inch and smaller pipe. Rated
deflection shall be not less than 1/2 degree for 42-inch and larger pipe.
Clow Corp., American Cast Iron Pipe Co., U.S. Pipe. Restrained joints
relying on metal teeth molded into the gasket to prevent joint separation
under pressure will not be accepted.
Grooved End: AWWA C606 and AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile iron,
250 psi minimum working pressure; Victaulic.
Flange: AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, Class 125
flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.
Joints
Couplings
Grooved End: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per
ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536; Victaulic.
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
Description
Grooved End Adapter Flanges: 250 psi minimum working pressure,
malleable iron per ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536;
Victaulic.
Bolting
Gaskets
Joint Lubricant
Manufacturers standard.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 3
SECTION 40 27 00.02
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP) AND FITTINGS
Item
Size
Description
Pipe
Joints
Fittings
Coating
All
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Pipe
Size
All
Description
Black carbon steel, ASTM A106/A106M,
Grade B seamless or ASTM A53/A53M,
Grade B seamless or ERW. Threaded, buttwelded, socket-welded, grooved end, and flanged
joints:
Screwed:
2" & smaller
Schedule 40.
Welded:
2-1/2" thru 10"
Schedule 40.
Grooved:
2-1/2" thru 6"
Schedule 40.
Socket-welded:
Joints
Fittings
Where indicated in
Piping Schedule
Schedule 160.
All
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Size
2-1/2" & larger
Description
Butt Welded: Wrought carbon steel buttwelding, ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB
meeting the requirements of ASME B16.9;
fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe;
long radius elbows unless shown otherwise.
Grooved End: Malleable iron
ASTM A47/A47M, ductile iron ASTM A536,
forged steel ASTM A234/A234M, or factory
fabricated from ASTM A53/A53M pipe.
Grooved ends to accept couplings without field
preparation. Victaulic Co.; Anvil International,
Inc., Gruvlok; Shurjoint Piping Products.
Branch
Connections
All
Flanges
All
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Size
2-1/2" & larger
Description
Butt-Welded Systems: Forged carbon steel,
ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150
or Class 300 slip-on or welding neck, 1/16-inch
raised face; weld neck bore to match pipe
internal diameter. Use weld neck flanges when
abutting butt-weld fittings. Weld slip-on flanges
inside and outside.
Grooved End Adapter Flange: Malleable iron
ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron ASTM A536.
Victaulic Style 741 or 743; Anvil International,
Inc., Gruvlok Figure 7012 or 7013; Shurjoint
Model 7041-A. Include stainless steel washer
plates as required for mating to serrated faces
and lined valves and equipment.
Cast Iron Mating Flange: AWWA C207, Class D
or E, hub or ring type to mate with ASME B16.1,
Class 125 cast-iron flange. AWWA C207
Class F hub type or ASTM A105/A105M,
ASME B16.5 Class 300 to mate with
ASME B16.1 Class 250 cast-iron flange.
Unions
Couplings
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Bolting
Size
All
Description
Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex
head bolts; ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts
and ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers
at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to
60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.
Where socket-welded pipe is indicated in the Piping
Schedule, bolting shall be carbon steel
ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B7 studs;
ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 2H hex head nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers at nuts
and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of
bolt minimum yield stress.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Gaskets
Size
All flanges
Description
Water, Steam, and Air Services: 1/16-inch-thick,
compressed inorganic fiber with nitrile binder,
rated 400 degrees F. continuous.
Fuel Gas Service: See Data Sheet 40 27 00.04
Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings Natural Gas
Service.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the
entire inside face with the gasket cemented to the
blind flange.
Grooved Couplings: EPDM per ASTM D2000
for water and oil-free air to 230 degrees F, nitrile
for oil vapor in air and oil services to
180 degrees F.
Thread
Lubricant
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.04
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSNATURAL GAS SERVICE
Item
Pipe
Size
All
Description
Black carbon steel, ASTM A106/A106M, Grade B
seamless or ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B seamless or
ERW. Threaded, butt-welded, grooved end, and flanged
joints:
Screwed:
2" & smaller
Schedule 40.
Welded:
2-1/2" thru 10
Joints
Fittings
Branch
Connections
Schedule 40.
Flanges
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.04
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSNATURAL GAS SERVICE
Item
Size
Description
weld neck bore to match pipe internal diameter. Use weld
neck flanges when abutting butt-weld fittings. Weld slipon flanges inside and outside.
Cast Iron Mating Flange: AWWA C207, Class D or E,
hub or ring type to mate with ASME B16.1, Class 125
cast-iron flange. AWWA C207 Class F hub type or
ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 300 to mate
with ASME B16.1 Class 250 cast-iron flange.
Unions
Couplings
Bolting
All
Gaskets
All flanges
Thread
Lubricant
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item
Size
Pipe
Joints
Description
Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A106, Grade B
seamless or ASTM A53, Grade B seamless or
ERW.
Schedule 80.
Schedule 40.
Fittings
Branch
Connections
Flanges
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item
Size
Description
Unions
Couplings
Plugs
Bolting
Gaskets
All flanges
Thread
Lubricant
Grooved end
couplings
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Pipe
Joints
Fittings
Branch Connections
Size
Description
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Flanges
Size
All
Description
Forged Stainless Steel:
ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F304L,
ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300, slipon weld neck or raised face. Weld slip-on
flanges inside and outside.
Cast Carbon Steel: ASTM A216/A216M
Grade WCA, drilled, ASME B16.5
Class 150 or Class 300 Van Stone Type with
stainless steel stub ends, ASTM A240
Type 304L as-welded grade, conforming
to MSS SP 43, wall thickness same as pipe.
Blind Flanges, exposed to the atmosphere
and not buried nor immersed in liquid, may
be either stainless steel or Class 125 ductile
iron or Class 150 carbon steel with gaskets
as specified herein.
Unions
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Bolting
Size
All
Description
Forged Flanges: Type 304 stainless steel,
ASTM A320/A320M Grade B8M hex head
bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex
head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3
alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt
minimum yield stress.
Van Stone Flanges and anywhere mating
flange on equipment is cast iron and gasket
is flat ring: Carbon steel ASTM A307
Grade B hex head bolts, ASTM A563
Grade A hex head nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers
at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to
60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.
Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and
Submerged and Wetted Installations:
Type 316 stainless steel,
ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M hex head
bolts and ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M
hex nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3
alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt
minimum yield stress.
Gaskets
All Flanges
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Thread Lubricant
Size
2" & smaller
Description
General Service: Nickel pigmented PTFE,
designed for stainless steel pipe, Air Force
A-A-58092, AA Thread Seal Tape, Inc.
Fuel Gas Service: Not used.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.10
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
Size
Description
General
All
Pipe
All
Fittings
All
Joints
All
Flanges
All
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 1
SECTION 40 27 00.10
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
Bolting
Size
Description
All
Gaskets
All
Solvent Cement
All
Thread Lubricant
All
Teflon Tape.
END OF SECTION
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.13
COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
Item
Description
General
Pipe
Tubing
Flanges
Bolting
Gaskets
Solder
Services:
Joints 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Wire solder (95-5 tin/antimony),
conforming to ASTM B32 Alloy Grade Sn95. Do not use cored
solder.
Joints Larger Than 2-1/2 Inch: Wire solder, melt range
approximately 440 degrees F to 660 degrees F, conforming to
ASTM B32 Alloy Grade HB or HN. Do not use cored solder.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 00.21
PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
Item
Pipe
Description
AASHTO MP6 (1050- to 1200-mm diameter), as manufactured
by ADS, or equal.
ASTM F894, PE3408 profile wall type pipe (Spirolite, or
equal), class 63, unless otherwise specified.
Provide magnetic tracer tape.
Profile
Type S and D.
Extruded ribs for gaining structural rigidity and strength.
Joints
Fittings
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROFILE WALL
POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
40 27 00.21 DATA SHEET - 1
SECTION 40 27 00.21
PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
Item
Flexible Connections
Description
Neoprene with coated stainless steel clamps, 1/2-inch thick.
Remarks:
1. Connections to stainless steel or FRP ductwork shall be made with flanged connections.
Flange dimensions and bolt pattern shall match.
2. Manufacture from materials that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM D3350 for a
minimum cell classification of PE 345434C.
3. Place bells facing upstream. Locate bell and spigot joints, pushed home, at each
structural joint indicated on Drawings.
4. Moe miter, minimum, per 45 degrees of deflection.
5. For bell and spigot connections, provide a minimum of two bell and spigot joints pulled
1-5/8 inches out from the home position for each 40 feet of pipe length.
6. Where joining of profile wall pipe by extrusion welding, all joints shall be performed by
factory trained technicians.
END OF SECTION
PROFILE WALL
POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
40 27 00.21 DATA SHEET - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 01
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
3.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
C.
1.03
Coupling Harness:
a.
Details, ratings, calculations and test reports for thrust restraints
relying on welded bars or rings.
b.
Weld procedure qualifications.
c.
Load proof-testing report of prototype restraint for any size
coupling.
Basket Strainer:
a.
Manufacturers written/printed installation instructions.
b.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools for basket strainer:
Item
B.
Quantity
Basket
Disc seals
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
CONNECTORS
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
D.
E.
F.
Type: Twin cam arm actuated, male and female, locking, for chemical
loading and transfer.
Materials: Glass-filled polypropylene or PVDF with EPDM, Viton-A or
Teflon gaskets as recommended for the service by manufacturer.
End Connections: NPT threaded or flanged to match piping connections.
Hose shank for chemical installations.
Plugs and Caps: Female dust cap for each male end; male dust plug for
each female end.
Pressure Rating: 125 psi, minimum, at 70 degrees F.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
OPW; Kamlock.
b.
Ryan Herco; 1300 Series.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
COUPLINGS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
2.
3.
F.
Dismantling Joints:
1.
2.
G.
Pressure Rating:
a.
Minimum working pressure rating shall not be less than rating of
the connecting flange.
b.
Proof testing shall conform to requirements of AWWA C219 for
bolted couplings.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 131.
b.
Smith Blair, Inc.; Model 975.
2.
3.
2.04
Pressure Rating:
a.
Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 150 psi.
b.
Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall
be supported by manufacturers proof testing.
Thrust Restraint:
a.
Provide hardened steel wedges that bear against and engage outer
pipe surface, and allow articulation of pipe joint after assembly
while wedges remain in their original setting position on pipe
surface.
b.
Products employing set screws that bear directly on pipe will not
be acceptable.
Manufacturer and Product: EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Mega-Flange.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Elastomer Bellows:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Size
(inch)
Deflection
(inch)
Pressure
(psig)
2-1/2 to 12
1.06
150
14
1.65
130
16 to 20
1.65
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
General Rubber Corp.; Style 1015 Maxijoint.
b.
Mercer; Flexmore Style 450.
c.
Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-711.
d.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Series 1500.
e.
Proco Products, Inc.; Series 251.
110
Teflon Bellows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Washers: Over retaining rings to help provide leak-proof joint under test
pressure.
Thrust Protection: Control rods to protect the bellows from
overextension.
Bellows Arch Lining: Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl.
Rated Temperature: 250 degrees F.
Rated Deflection and Pressure:
a.
Lateral Deflection: 3/4 inch, minimum.
b.
Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure.
c.
Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as
follows:
Metal Bellows:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
D.
Teflon Bellows
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Material: Stainless steel bellows with female copper solder joint ends.
Working Pressure Rating: 175 psig, minimum.
Accessories: Anti-torque device to protect bellows.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Senior Flexonics; Model HB.
b.
Hyspan; Model 8510.
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style EC-FFS.
G.
F.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.05
Design:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
2.06
End Connections:
a.
3 Inches and Larger: Shop fabricated flanged ends to match
mating flanges.
b.
2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Screwed ends with one union end.
Minimum Burst Pressure: 600 psig at 70 degrees F for 12 inches and
smaller.
Length: Provide hose live-length equal to lengths shown on Drawings.
Manufacturer:
a.
U.S. Hose Corp.; Series 401M.
b.
Anamet Industrial, Inc.; BWC21-1.
Product as specified for water hose, except 3/8 inch with male NPT ends, in
2-foot lengths.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.07
SERVICE SADDLES
A.
Double-Strap Iron:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Nylon-Coated Iron:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.08
PIPE GUIDES
A.
Alignment Guides:
1.
2.
2.09
OUTLET/TAPPING SADDLES
A.
Materials:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
2.10
B.
C.
D.
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
3.
B.
C.
Molded HDPE with integral water stop ring not less than 3 inches larger
than sleeve.
Provided with end caps for support during concrete placement.
Manufacturer and Product: Century-Line, Model CS sleeves as
manufactured by PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
3.
4.
2.11
5.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.12
Chemical Injectors:
1.
2.
B.
Support System:
1.
2.
C.
2.13
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
A.
Spray Nozzles
1.
2.
B.
Type 8:
a.
Spray pattern: Narrow angle, high impact.
b.
Spray Angle: 35 degrees at 40 psi.
c.
Material: 316 stainless steel.
d.
Orifice Diameter: 11/64 inch.
e.
Capacity: 9.5 gpm at 100 psi.
f.
Size: 1/2-inch NPT.
g.
Manufacturer: Spraying Systems Co., Model Series FlatJet or
equal.
Type 12:
a.
Spray Pattern: Full cone.
b.
Spray Angle: 60 degrees.
c.
Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
d.
Orifice Diameter: 1/2 inch.
e.
Capacity: 35 gpm at 80 psi.
f.
Size: 1/2-inch NPT.
g.
Manufacturer: Spraying Systems Co., Model Series Full Jet, or
equal.
Type: Bronze body, Y-pattern, 200 psi nonshock rated, with screwed
gasketed bronze cap.
Screen: Heavy-gauge Type 304 stainless steel or monel, 20-mesh.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
C.
D.
2.
3.
4.
Type: Y-pattern PVC body, 150 psi nonshock rated, with screwed PVC
cap and Viton seals.
End Connections: Screwed or solvent weld, 2 inches and smaller.
Class 150 ANSI flanged, 2-1/2 inches and larger.
Screen: Heavy-gauge PVC, 1/32-inch mesh, minimum 2 to 1 screen area
to pipe size ratio.
Manufacturer: Hayward.
Quick Couplings:
1.
F.
Type: Cast iron or ductile iron body, Y-pattern, 175 psi nonshock rated,
with flanged gasketed iron cap.
Screen: Heavy-gauge Type 316 stainless steel, 0.045-inch perforations.
Manufacturer and Product: Armstrong International, Inc.;
Model A7FL 125.
E.
Provide female NPT by male quick-connect hose adapters for all -, 1-,
and 1-1/2-inch hose valves and hydrants and provide female NPT by
female quick-connect hose couplers for all flushing connections.
Provide a hose shank quick-connect hose coupler on one end and a hose
shank quick-connect hose adapter on the other end of each water hose
provided for this project. All adapters and couplers shall satisfy
dimensional requirements of MIL-C-27487E and shall be stainless steel
and sized as shown on the Drawings. Adapters and couplers shall be
Dover Corp., OPW Division, Kamlok Series, or Dixon Cam and Groove
Couplings.
Material: Polypropylene
Size: 2-inch
Male coupler end with female locking cap.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Harrington Industrial Plastics, Inc. Part FPP with Part DC female
cap.
b.
Ryan Herco Industrial Plastics; Part 1301 or 1302 with 1314
female cap.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
Water Hose:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Hose Nozzles:
1.
2.
I.
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
3.02
Furnish cast brass, satin finish nozzles with adjustable fog, straightstream, and shut-off feature and rubber bumper, one nozzle per hose
bibb at each hose rack. Provide nozzles with female NST hose thread,
sized to match hose connections indicated on the Drawings.
Manufacturers:
a.
Croker.
b.
Elkhart.
PART 3
Furnish 50-foot lengths of rubber hose, two lengths at each hose rack,
size to match hose connections indicated on the Drawings. EPDM black
cover and EPDM tube, reinforced with two textile braids. Provide each
length with brass male and female NST hose thread couplings to fit hose
nozzle and hose valve.
Rated minimum working pressure of 200 psi.
Manufacturers:
a.
Goodyear.
b.
Boston.
General:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
C.
D.
3.03
Install 18 inches or less from face of structures; joint may be flush with
face.
Install a second flexible joint, whether or not shown.
a.
Pipe Diameter 18 Inches and Smaller: Within 18 inches of first
joint.
b.
Pipe Diameter Larger than 18 Inches: Within one pipe diameter of
first joint.
PIPING TRANSITION
A.
Applications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.04
PIPING EXPANSION
A.
B.
Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.
Field Weld: Stainless steel bellows beveled ends joined to ALP carbon
steel piping in accordance with approved welding procedures.
Lining:
a.
System No. 4, high-temperature epoxy, in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b.
Field apply lining to protect bellows and piping from rust at
welded joint.
c.
Line both ends inside bellows, entire length of extension stub end,
and from weld joint to a distance of 1 foot inside length of the
carbon steel pipe.
Coating:
a.
System No. 4, high-temperature epoxy, in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b.
Field apply coating to protect bellows and piping from weather
and rust at welded joint.
c.
Coat both ends outside bellows, entire length of extension stub
end, and from weld joint to a distance of 1 foot outside length of
the carbon steel pipe.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
3.05
3.06
SERVICE SADDLES
A.
B.
OUTLET/TAPPING SADDLE
A.
3.07
COUPLINGS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.08
B.
C.
Limit Bolts and Control Rods: Tighten snug prior to applying pressure to
system.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.09
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.10
Applications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.11
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 27 02
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
e.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PART 2
2.01
Shop Drawings:
a.
Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type
Number, applicable Tag Number, and facility name/number or
service where used.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
d.
For each power actuator provided, Manufacturers standard data
sheet, with application specific features and options clearly
identified.
e.
Sizing calculations for open-close/throttle and modulating valves.
f.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.02
B.
C.
Valve same size as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise called out on Drawings or
in Supplements.
D.
E.
F.
Size operators and actuators to operate valve for the full range of pressures
and velocities.
G.
H.
SCHEDULE
A.
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Bronze and brass valve components and accessories that have surfaces in
contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and
2 percent aluminum.
1.
2.
B.
Valve materials in contact with or intended for drinking water service to meet
the following requirements:
1.
2.
Comply with requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other
applicable federal, state, and local requirements.
Coatings materials to be formulated from materials deemed acceptable
to NSF61.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
2.04
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
4.
B.
Exposed Valves:
1.
2.
2.05
VALVES
A.
Gate Valves:
1.
General:
a.
AWWA gate valves to be in full compliance with stated AWWA
standard and the following requirements:
1)
Provide 2-inch operating nut and handwheel for AWWA
gate valves 12 inches and smaller.
2)
Provide totally enclosed spur or bevel gear operator with
indicator for AWWA gate valves 14 inches and larger.
3)
Provide Affidavit of Compliance per the applicable AWWA
standard for AWWA gate valves.
4)
Mark AWWA gate valves with manufacturers name or
mark, year of valve casting, valve size, and working water
pressure.
5)
Repaired AWWA gate valves shall not be submitted or
supplied.
6)
Supply AWWA gate valves with stainless steel bolting.
7)
AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 valves may be substituted
for each other.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Globe Valves:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
C.
Ball Valves:
1.
2.
3.
Type V300 Ball Valve 3 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air
Service:
a.
Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and
end piece, hard chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE
seats and packing, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland,
zinc-coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated
600-pound WOG, 150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Threaded:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 70-100.
b)
Nibco; T-580-70.
2)
Soldered:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 70-200.
b)
Nibco; S-580-70.
Type V301 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air
Service:
a.
Two-piece, full port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and end
piece, hard chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats
and packing, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, zinccoated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 600-pound
WOG, 150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Threaded:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 77-100.
b)
Nibco; T-585-70.
2)
Soldered:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 77-200.
b)
Nibco; S-585-70.
Type V302 Actuator Ready Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for
General Water and Air Service:
a.
Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and
end piece, actuator mounting pad, Type 316 stainless steel ball
and stem, vented ball, reinforced PTFE seats and seals, adjustable
packing nut, blowout-proof stem, rated 600-pound WOG,
150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 71-140.
2)
Milwaukee; 20BSOR-02.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Type V303 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for Equipment Air System
Shutoff:
a.
Two-piece, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and end piece, hard
chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats and packing,
blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, 125 psig rated,
safety exhaust port to exhaust downstream side when valve is in
closed position, zinc-coated steel locking handle with vinyl grip.
b.
Meets OSHA Regulation 29 CFR Part 1910.147 requirements.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 75-100-41.
2)
Nibco; T-580-70-SV/T-585-70-SV.
Type V305 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for Natural Gas Service:
a.
Two-piece bronze or forged brass body and end piece, NPT
threaded ends, hard chrome plated solid brass ball, RTFE seats
and seal, blowout-proof stem, zinc-plated hand lever operator with
vinyl grip, UL Listed Guide YRPV for natural/manufactured gas,
600 WOG.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 80-100.
2)
Nibco; T-585-70-UL/T-580-70-UL.
Type V306 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Two-piece, full port, ASTM A276 GR 316 or
ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end
piece, NPT threaded ends, ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel
ball, reinforced PTFE seats, seals, and packing, adjustable packing
gland, blowout proof stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever
operator with vinyl grip, rated 1,000 psig CWP, complies with
MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 76F-100 Series.
2)
Nibco; T-585-S6-R-66-LL.
Type V307 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Three-piece, full port, ASTM A276 GR 316 or
ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end
pieces, Type 316 stainless steel ball, NPT threaded ends,
reinforced PTFE seats, seals, and packing, adjustable packing
gland, blowout-proof stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever
operator with vinyl grip, rated 800 psig to 1,000 psig CWP,
complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 86R-100/86-500 Series.
2)
Nibco; T-595-S6-R-66-LL.
Type V308 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends,
ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
9.
10.
11.
D.
pieces, actuator mounting pad, Type 316 stainless steel ball and
stem, vented ball, reinforced PTFE seats and seals, adjustable
packing nut, blowout-proof stem, rated 1,500 psig WOG
minimum, 150 psi SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 76-100.
2)
Nibco; T-580-S6-R-66-LL.
3)
Milwaukee; 20SSOR-02.
Type V320 Vee-Ball Valve 1 Inch to 16 Inches:
a.
ANSI Class 150-pound flanged ends, Type 317 stainless steel
body, heat treated nickel- or hard chromium-plated Type 317
stainless steel ball, splined-type 17-4 PH stainless steel shafts,
reinforced PTFE flow-ring seal, reinforced PTFE with stainless
steel or Hastalloy sleeve bearings, and PTFE V-ring packing.
Valve to have 300:1 rangeability and equal percentage
characteristic.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Fisher Controls: Design V150.
2)
DeZurik: VPB V-Port Ball Valve.
Type V330 PVC Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784, Type I,
Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry, double
union design, solvent-weld socket ends, elastomer seat, Viton or
Teflon O-ring stem seals, to block flow in both directions.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc.
2)
ASAHI/America; Type 21.
3)
Spears; True Union.
Type V331 PVC Ball Valve 3 Inches and 4 Inches:
a.
Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784 Type I, Grade 1
PVC full port body, Teflon seat, Viton O-ring stem, face and
carrier seals, end entry design with dual union, solvent-weld
socket ends, or single union ball valve with flanged ends drilled to
ASME B16.1.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc.
2)
ASAHI/America; Type 21.
Plug Valves:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
Butterfly Valves:
1.
2.
3.
General:
a.
In full compliance with AWWA C504 and following
requirements:
1)
Suitable for throttling operations and infrequent operation
after periods of inactivity.
2)
Elastomer seats which are bonded or vulcanized to the body
shall have adhesive integrity of bond between seat and body
assured by testing, with minimum 75-pound pull in
accordance with ASTM D429, Method B.
3)
Bubble-tight with rated pressure applied from either side.
Test valves with pressure applied in both directions.
4)
No travel stops for disc on interior of body.
5)
Self-adjusting V-type or O-ring shaft seals.
6)
Isolate metal-to-metal thrust bearing surfaces from
flowstream.
7)
Provide traveling nut or worm gear actuator with
handwheel. Valve actuators to meet the requirements of
AWWA C504.
8)
Buried service operators shall withstand 450 foot-pounds of
input torque at fully open and fully closed positions.
9)
Provide linings and coatings per AWWA, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
10) Valves to be in full compliance with NSF 61.
b.
Non-AWWA butterfly valves to meet the following actuator
requirements:
1)
For above ground installations, provide handle and notch
plate for valves 6 inches and smaller and heavy-duty, totally
enclosed gearbox type operators with handwheel, position
indicator and travel stops for valves 8 inches and larger,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein.
Type V500 Butterfly Valve Water Works Service 3 Inches to 72 Inches:
a.
AWWA C504, Class 150B.
b.
Short body type, flanged ends.
c.
Cast-iron body, cast or ductile iron disc, Type 304 stainless steel
shafts, Buna-N rubber seat bonded or molded in body only, and
stainless steel seating surface.
d.
Provide epoxy lining in compliance with AWWA C550.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Model 2FII or Triton XR-70.
2)
DeZurik; AWWA Valve.
Type V502 Butterfly Valve General Service 3 Inches to 20 Inches:
a.
AWWA C504, Class 150B.
b.
Wafer style type.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
F.
c.
Buna-N rubber seat.
Type V504 Butterfly Valve General Service 4 Inches to 48 Inches:
a.
AWWA C504, Class 150B.
b.
Mechanical joint end type.
c.
Cast-iron body, cast or ductile iron disc, Type 304 stainless steel
shafts, Buna-N rubber seat bonded or molded in body only, and
stainless steel seating surface.
d.
Provide epoxy lining in compliance with AWWA C550.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Groundhog.
2)
DeZurik; Buried AWWA Valve.
Type V513 Butterfly Valve 2 Inches to 20 Inches:
a.
Wafer Lug style, ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc,
Type 316 or 18-8 stainless steel one-piece stem, Buna-N
replaceable resilient seat, heavy-duty self-lubricating sleeve type
bushings, NBR stem seal, 150 psi working pressure rating, valve
body to fit between ANSI Class 125/150 flanges.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Bray Controls; Series 30/31.
2)
Tyco/Keystone; Model AR1/AR2.
3)
Crane/Centerline; Series 200.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
4.
c.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
9.
10.
G.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
7.
8.
9.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
10.
11.
12.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
13.
14.
that accumulates in system. Single body unit with air and vacuum
valve and an air release valve in a single housing.
b.
Rated working pressure of 150 psi, built and tested to
AWWA C512.
c.
Materials: Cast-iron or ductile iron body and covers, NTP
threaded inlet and outlet, with concave or skirted stainless steel
float and trim.
d.
Sewage air release valve fitted with blowoff valve, flushing valve
with quick disconnect couplings, and a minimum 5 feet of hose
with quick disconnect couplings to permit backflushing after
installation without dismantling valve.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 440 SCAV.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 800.
Type V756 Sewage Combination Air and Vacuum Valve 6 Inches to
14 Inches:
a.
Suitable for sewage service; combines the operating functions of
both an air and vacuum valve and an air release valve using
separate valves connected together. The air and vacuum valve
shall automatically exhaust large quantities of air during system
filling and allow air to re-enter during draining or when a vacuum
occurs. Air release valve to automatically exhaust small quantities
of entrained air that accumulates in system.
b.
Rated working pressure of 150 psi.
c.
Materials: Cast-Iron or Ductile Iron Body:
1)
Air and Vacuum Valve:
a)
Upper and lower concave or skirted stainless steel
float and trim.
b)
Inlet Flanges: ASME B16.1 Class 125 pound.
c)
Outlet: Hooded.
d)
Seat: Buna-N.
2)
Air Release Valve: 2-inch NPT threaded inlet and 1/2-inch
NPT threaded outlet; Buna-N seat.
d.
Provide with all-bronze blow-off and flushing gate valves for each
valve, all-bronze isolation gate valve between the air and vacuum
valve and the air release valve; 5-foot rubber hose with quick
disconnect couplings.
e.
Manufacturer and Product: APCO Valve and Primer Corp.;
Series 400C.
Type V757 Sewage Rolling Seal Combination Air Valve 2 Inches to
8 Inches:
a.
Designed for sewage service, uses rolling seal to allow smaller
and larger amounts of air to automatically exhaust under pressure
and air to enter when a vacuum occurs all in a single valve body.
Body designed to allow sewage solids to flow out of valve.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
d.
H.
Epoxy coated steel funnel shaped body with ANSI Class 150
flanged inlet and access flanges, reinforced nylon combination air
and vacuum valve assembly and polypropylene discharge elbow,
250-psi working pressure, all-bronze drain/flush valve, flushing
connection.
Foamed polypropylene float, EPDM rubber rolling seal
mechanism with reinforced nylon plug, plug cover, and clamping
stem, Buna-N O-ring.
Manufacturer and Product: ARI Valves; D-020.
Miscellaneous Valves:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
d.
2.06
Manual Operators:
1.
2.
3.
General:
a.
For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of
the applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator
when force exceeds requirements.
b.
For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable
industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under any
operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear
reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.
c.
Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device.
d.
Position indicator on quarter-turn valves.
e.
Worm and gear operators one-piece design, worm-gears of gear
bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground
and polished. Traveling nut type operators threaded steel reach
rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
Exposed Operator:
a.
Galvanized and painted handwheel.
b.
Cranks on gear type operator.
c.
Chain wheel operator with tieback, extension stem, floor stand,
and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation
level.
d.
Valve handles to take a padlock, and wheels a chain and padlock.
Buried Operator:
a.
Buried service operators on valves larger than 2-1/2 inches shall
have a 2-inch AWWA operating nut. Buried operators on valves
2 inches and smaller shall have cross handle for operation by
forked key. Enclose moving parts of valve and operator in housing
to prevent contact with the soil.
b.
Buried service operators to be grease packed and gasketed to
withstand a submersion in water to 20 feet minimum.
c.
Buried valves shall have extension stems, bonnets, and valve
boxes.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Type: Large Open Close (LOC), Large Modulating (LM), Large Quarter
Turn Open Close (LQTOC) and Large Quarter Turn Modulating
(LQTM) Actuators:
a.
Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque
not to exceed torque capacity of valve.
b.
Stem protection for rising stem valves.
c.
Actuator OperationGeneral:
1)
Suitable for full 90-degree rotation of quarter-turn valves or
for use on multiturn valves, as applicable.
2)
Actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in an oil filled
gearcase suitable for operation at any angle.
3)
The manual override handwheel must be mechanically
independent of the motor drive, and any gearing should be
such as to permit emergency manual operation in a
reasonable time.
4)
Valve position indication.
5)
Comply with latest version of AWWA C542.
6)
Controls intergral with actuator and fully equipped as
specified in AWWA C542.
7)
Operate from FULL CLOSED to FULL OPEN positions or
the reverse in the number of seconds given in the Electric
Motor Actuator Schedule.
8)
Nonintrusive Electronics: Local controls, diagnostics, and
calibration, including limit and torque switch settings, shall
be accomplished nonintrusively. Electronic valve position
display with capability to show continuous torque output.
Provide two hand-held configuration units for every
10 actuators provided, two minimum.
9)
Each actuator must be factory performance tested. See
Information Submittal section above for required
certificates.
10) Fabricated Slide Gates:
a)
Rated running torque equal to 20 percent of the motor
starting torque at a rated running time of 15 minutes,
without exceeding the allowable NEMA temperature
rise for the insulation class used.
b)
Clear UV resistant plastic pipe stem cover with cap
and mylar strip gauge.
d.
Open-Close(OC) /and Throttling Service:
1)
Size motors for one complete OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycle
no less than once every 10 minutes.
2)
Actuator suitable for throttling operation of valve at
intermediate positions.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3)
e.
f.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3)
4)
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8)
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4)
5)
c.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
d.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
m) The following derived diagnostic information shall be
able to be downloadable over a PDA or available twowire communication link:
(1) Valve signature plot.
(2) Dynamic response tests.
(3) Step change response tests.
(4) Internal Integrity Diagnostic.
(5) Dwell time plot.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Rotork Controls; CVA.
2)
Or equal.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Tagging: 1-1/2-inch diameter stainless steel tag with No. 16 stainless steel
jack chain for each valve and valve actuator bearing the valve tag number to
be assigned by the Engineer and Owner during construction.
B.
Limit Switch:
1.
2.
C.
3.
D.
Floor Stand:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
E.
Floor Box:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
G.
H.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.01
Cast-Iron Valve Box: Designed for traffic loads, sliding type, with minimum
of 5-1/4-inch ID shaft.
1.
2.
PART 3
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Flange Ends:
1.
2.
B.
Screwed Ends:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
PVC and CPVC Valves: Install using solvents approved for valve service
conditions.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General:
a.
Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed
without encountering obstructions.
b.
Install valves in location for easy access for routine operation and
maintenance.
c.
Install valves per manufacturers recommendations.
Gate, Globe, and Ball Valves:
a.
Install operating stem vertical when valve is installed in horizontal
runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less
above finished floor, unless otherwise shown.
b.
Install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having
centerline elevations greater than 4 feet 6 inches above finish
floor, unless otherwise shown.
Eccentric Plug Valves:
a.
Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve as
follows:
1)
Liquids with suspended solids service with horizontal flow:
Install valve with stem in horizontal position with plug up
when valve is open. Install valve with seat end upstream
(flow to produce unseating pressure).
2)
Liquids with suspended solids service with vertical flow:
Install valve with seat in highest portion of valve (seat up).
3)
Clean Liquids and Gas Service: Install valve with seat end
downstream of higher pressure when valve is closed (higher
pressure forces plug into seat).
Butterfly Valves:
a.
Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve a
minimum of 8 diameters downstream of a horizontal elbow or
branch tee with shaft in horizontal position.
b.
For vertical elbow or branch tee immediately upstream of valve,
install valve with shaft in vertical position.
c.
For horizontal elbow or branch tee immediately upstream of
valve, install valve with shaft in horizontal position.
d.
When installed immediately downstream of a swing check, install
valve with shaft perpendicular to swing check shaft.
e.
For free inlet or discharge into basins and tanks, install valve with
shaft in vertical position.
Check Valves:
a.
Install valve in horizontal or vertical flow (up) flow piping only
for liquid services.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
3.02
Install valve in vertical flow (up) piping only for gas services.
Install swing check valve with shaft in horizontal position.
E.
Install a line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line
flow switch, or other in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters,
for isolation during maintenance.
F.
G.
Extension Stem for Operator: Where the depth of the valve operating nut is
3 feet or greater below finish grade, furnish an operating extension stem with
2-inch operating nut to bring operating nut to a point within 6 inches of finish
grade.
H.
Torque Tube: Where operator for quarter-turn valve is located on floor stand,
furnish extension stem torque tube of a type properly sized for maximum
torque capacity of valve.
I.
Floor Box and Stem: Steel extension stem length shall locate operating nut in
floor box.
J.
Chain Wheel and Guide: Install chain wheel and guide assemblies or chain
lever assemblies on manually operated valves over 6 feet 9 inches above
finish floor. Install chain to within 3 feet 0 inch of finish floor. Where chains
hang in normally traveled areas, use appropriate L type tie-back anchors.
Install chains to within operator horizontal reach of 2 feet 6 inches maximum,
measured from normal operator standing location or station.
B.
Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions.
Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure
conditions from both directions.
C.
Inspect air and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and
seating is fully functional.
D.
Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for any
discrepancies with manufacturers data.
E.
Set, verify, and record set pressures for relief and regulating valves.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.03
F.
G.
Test hydrostatic relief valve seating; record leakage. Adjust and retest to
maximum leakage of 0.1 gpm per foot of seat periphery.
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
No. of
Trips
Valves 24 inches
and larger
Electrical actuated
valves
No. of
Days at
Jobsite
1
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Notes
C.
3.04
Valve
Type/Description
No. of
Trips
Reduced-pressure
backflow preventers
Self-contained, pilot
operated valves
No. of
Days at
Jobsite
1
Notes
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are part of this
Specification.
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Tag Number
Valve Type
AER-FCV-30881
AER-FCV-30882
AER-FV-P-30885
AER-FCV-30885
AER-FCV-30886
AER-FV-P-30886
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
existing
butterfly
existing
butterfly
butterfly
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
solenoid
(V-940)
solenoid
(V-940)
solenoid
solenoid
AER-FV-35151
AER-FV-35152
AER-FV-35153
DFT-FV-35421
DFT-FV-35431
DFT-FCV-35441
DFT-FCV-35442
DFT-FV-35451
AER-FCV-39101
THK-FCV-P-63041
THK-FCV-P-63043
THK-FV-P-63051
THK-FV-P-63052
THK-FV-P-63053
THK-FV-P-63054
THK-FCV-63071
THK-FCV-63072
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Valve
Size
(inches)
Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)
Maximum
P
(psi)
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
8000
8000
4000
4000
4000
4000
RAS
Process
Fluid
Service
Travel Time
(Seconds)
Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements
10
10
10
10
10
10
M
M
O/C
M
M
O/C
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, J
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, J
LM
LM
LQTOC
LQTM
LQTM
LQTOC
12000
20
O/C
30-60 sec
B, D, J
LM
RAS
12000
20
O/C
30-60 sec
B, D, J
LM
8
8
4
4
8
4
1
1.5
RAS
WAS
WAS
WAS
WAS
WAS
SSM
VFLT
VFLT
12000
510
510
510
510
50
24
86
20
25
25
25
25
25
25
40
40
O/C
O/C
O/C
M
M
O/C
M
M
M
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
B, D, J
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, D, I
B, E, I
B, E, I
B, E, I
LM
SQTOC
SQTOC
SM
SM
SQTOC
SM
SM
SM
W3
48
50
O/C
30-60 sec
B, I
SOLENOID
W3
48
50
O/C
30-60 sec
B, I
SOLENOID
2
1.5
W3
W3
WAS
FPS/WAS
48
22
50
50
O/C
O/C
M
M
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
B, I
B, I
B, E, I
B, E, I
SOLENOID
SOLENOID
SM
SM
Actuator Type
Tag Number
THK-FCV-63073
THK-FCV-63074
THK-FV-63171
THK-FV-63172
THK-FV-63191
THK-FV-63201
THK-FV-63211
THK-FV-63221
THK-FV-63231
THK-FV-63232
THK-FV-63241
THK-FV-63242
THK-FV-63243
THK-FV-63244
THK-FV-P-63271
THK-FV-P-63272
THK-FV-P-63273
THK-FV-P-63274
THK-FV-63281
THK-FV-63282
WSR-GTE-P-64061
WSR-GTE-P-64062
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(inches)
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
12
12
10
12
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
4
4
4
4
slide gate
See
Section
35 20
16.25
See
Section
35 20
16.25
slide gate
Process
Fluid
FPS/WAS
FPS
FPS
FPS/WAS
PFLT
PFLT
VFLT
VFLT
PO
PO
PO
PO
PO
PO
WAS
WAS
WAS/FPS
FPS
PFLT/VFLT
VFLT
WAS
WAS
Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)
Maximum
P
(psi)
551
551
161
161
40
10
10
10
262
262
262
187
20
20
20
20
510
See
Section 35
20 16.25
510
See
Section 35
20 16.25
Service
Travel Time
(Seconds)
M
M
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
12-inches /
minute
O/C
12-inches /
minute
Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements
B, E, I
B, E, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
Actuator Type
SM
SM
SQTOC
SQTOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
LOC
LOC
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Tag Number
Valve Type
THK-FV-P-71031
THK-FV-P-71032
THK-FV-P-71033
THK-GTE-P-71081
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
slide gate
THK-GTE-P-71111
slide gate
THK-GTE-P-71112
slide gate
THK-FV-P-71121
THK-FCV-P-71161
THK-FCV-P-71162
THK-FV-P-63011B
THK-FV-P-63012B
THK-FV-P-63013B
THK-FV-P-63014B
solenoid
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
ball
ball
ball
ball
Valve
Size
(inches)
8
8
8
See
Section
35 20
16.25
See
Section
35 20
16.25
See
Section
35 20
16.25
2
4
4
3
3
3
3
Process
Fluid
Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)
Maximum
P
(psi)
Service
Travel Time
(Seconds)
Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements
B, D, J
B, D, J
B, D, J
Actuator Type
FPS
FPS
FPS
N/A
850
850
850
N/A
50
50
50
See
Section 35
20 16.25
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
12-inches /
minute
N/A
N/A
See
Section 35
20 16.25
O/C
12-inches /
minute
LOC
N/A
N/A
See
Section 35
20 16.25
O/C
12-inches /
minute
LOC
W3
TPS
TPS
PWAS
PWAS
FPS/PWAS
FPS
72
57.5
57.5
80
80
80
80
20
10
10
120
120
120
120
O/C
M
M
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
B, D, I
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
LQTOC
LQTOC
LQTOC
LOC
SOLENOID
SM
SM
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Tag Number
Valve Type
Valve
Size
(inches)
Process
Fluid
Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)
Maximum
P
(psi)
Service
Travel Time
(Seconds)
Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements
Actuator Type
D = Remote OPEN-CLOSE maintained dry contacts; travel stops when remote contact opens, or when end of travel limit is reached. 120V dry contacts for open and close position
status.
E = 4-20mA position control and 4-20mA position feedback. 120Vac contact for remote mode status.
F = Motor and control enclosure(s) NEMA 250, Type 6 (IP 68).
G = Motor and control enclosure(s) NEMA 250, Type 7.
H = 120V dry contacts for open and close position status.
I= Operation from 120-volt, single-phase power.
J = Operation from 480V, three-phase power.
K = Formerly HDW-GTE-P-20311. Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with modulating type specified.
L = Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with modulating type specified.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Size
(inches)
Inlet*
Pressure
THK-PCV-P-63051
THK-PCV-P-63052
THK-PCV-P-63053
Outlet*
Pressure
Maximum
psig
Flow
(gpm)
Fluid
40
48
W3
40
48
W3
40
48
W3
THK-PCV-P-63054
1.5
40
22
W3
THK-PCV-P-63011
40
56
W2
THK-PCV-P-63012
40
56
W2
THK-PCV-P-63013
40
79
W2
THK-PCV-P-63014
40
79
W2
THK-PCV-P-63031
1/4
50
0.5-1
W2
THK-PCV-P-63032
1/4
50
0.5-1
W2
THK-PCV-P-71121
72
W3
20
*Inlet Pressure = Set pressure for pressure relief valve or downstream set pressure for pressure reducing valve.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 42 13
PROCESS PIPING INSULATION
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
PIPE INSULATION
A.
Type 1Elastomeric:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Type 2Fiberglass:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
C.
Type 3Foamglass:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.02
FITTING INSULATION
A.
B.
Type 2:
1.
2.
C.
2.03
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.04
2.05
B.
C.
Type F1PVC:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Type F2Paint:
1.
2.
C.
Type 1 Insulation: Acrylic latex paint, white, and suitable for outdoor
use.
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Armstrong; WB Armaflex finish.
2)
Rubatex; 374, white finish.
Type 2 Insulation: In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating.
Type F3Aluminum:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
APPLICATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
C.
D.
Placement:
1.
2.
Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material.
Seal and tape joints.
E.
Heat Traced Piping: Apply insulation after heat-tracing work is completed and
inspected.
F.
Roof Drains: Insulate vertical drops from roof drains to horizontal pipe,
exposed and concealed horizontal piping, and 2 feet down on vertical risers
from horizontal pipe.
G.
Roof Drains and Overflow Drains: Insulate entire pipe runs. Where roof and
overflow drains exist through an exterior wall ensure annular space between
pipes and walls are properly sealed prior to insulating.
H.
I.
Vapor Barrier:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
J.
Aluminum Jacket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.03
FIELD FINISHING
A.
B.
Where pipe labels or banding are specified, apply to finished insulation, not to
pipe.
C.
3.04
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Service Type
Pipe
Legend
DWDomestic and
Service Hot Water
Systems.
HW
FLUSHING HOT
WATER
FHW
HIGH PRESSURE
HOT WATER
HPHW
WaterSystems
W1 W2
W3
W5
HTPiping requiring
heat tracing.
Thickness
Fluid
Temperature
(degrees F)*
ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in thickest
insulation.
105 to 140
ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in thickest
insulation.
140 to 180
ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in thickest
insulation.
105 to 140
ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in the
thickest
insulation.
40 to 60
Pipe Size:
Insulation
Thickness
Inches:a
1/4-3/4: 1/2
1-3: 1
3.5-10: 1.5
12-16: 2
18-24: 2.5
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Finish Systems
Insulation
Type 1
Concealed
from View
None
Indoors
Exposed
F3 below 8'
Outdoors
Buried
F3
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
F3
F4 on
Type 3
F3
F4 on
Type 3
F2 above 8'
Type 2
None
Type 1
F3 below 8'
F1 above 8'
None
F3 below 8'
F1 above 8'
Type 1
None
F3 below 8'
F2 above 8'
Type 2
Insulate and heat
trace outside lines 1'
above grade. Use
Type 3 insulation
from 1 foot above
grade to frost depth.
None
F3 below 8'
F1 above 8'
Service Type
Pipe
Legend
Thickness
Fluid
Temperature
(degrees F)*
Finish Systems
Insulation
Concealed
from View
Indoors
Exposed
Outdoors
Buried
*Use these fluid temperatures unless otherwise noted in the Piping Schedule.
Inchesa: Based upon insulation with glass fiber per ASTM C547, outdoors with 20 mph wind with 10 percent safety and no value assigned to cladding or air
space at cladding. Matches the watts per foot in Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 80 01
PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information
that follows.
a.
Testing dates.
b.
Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.
c.
Test type.
d.
Method of isolation.
e.
Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s)
to be tested.
Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment.
Certified Test Report.
PART 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Pressure Piping:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 1
b.
4.
5.
C.
Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure
prior to testing.
D.
Gravity Piping:
1.
2.
3.
3.02
Test joint between new piping and existing piping by methods that
do not place entire existing system under test load, as approved by
Engineer.
Items that do not require testing include: Piping between wetwells and
wetwell isolation valves, Equipment seal drains, tank overflows to
atmospheric vented drains, and tank atmospheric vents.
Test Pressure: As indicated on Piping Schedule, or as specified by
equipment manufacturer.
B.
Exposed Piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Buried Piping:
1.
2.
PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump.
Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached.
Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum,
reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure.
Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to
maintain specified test pressure for duration of test.
Maximum Allowable Leakage:
L=
SD(P )1 / 2
133,200
where:
L
S
D
P
7.
3.03
=
=
=
=
B.
C.
Procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 3
3.04
D.
E.
After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry
flammable or combustible gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be
present in system during filling process.
B.
Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallons per hour per inch diameter per
100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to
minimum head specified.
C.
Gravity Sanitary and Roof Drain Piping: Test in accordance with the Uniform
Plumbing Code, 2009. Test with 10 feet of water to include highest horizontal
vent in filled piping. Where vertical drain and vent systems exceed 10 feet in
height, test systems in 10-foot vertical sections as piping is installed.
D.
Exfiltration Test:
1.
2.
E.
Hydrostatic Head:
a.
At least 6 feet above maximum estimated groundwater level in
section being tested.
No less than 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in
b.
test section, including service connections.
Length of Pipe Tested: Limit length such that pressure on invert of
lower end of section does not exceed 30 feet of water column.
Infiltration Test:
1.
F.
Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage rate
for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a
pressure test.
G.
Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and retest
as specified.
PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.05
6.
Test date.
Description and identification of piping tested.
Test fluid.
Test pressure.
Remarks, including:
a.
Leaks (type, location).
b.
Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.
Signed by Contractor and Engineer to represent that test has been
satisfactorily completed.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 5
SECTION 40 90 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.03
d.
B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
e.
B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
Deutsche Industrie-Norm (DIN): VDE 0611, Specification for modular
terminal blocks for connection of copper conductors up to 1,000V ac
and up to 1,200V dc.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): C62.41,
Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
International Society of Automation (ISA):
a.
RP12.06.01, Recommended Practice for Wiring Methods for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation Part 1:
Instrinsic Safety.
b.
S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
c.
S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams.
d.
S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial
Process Instruments.
e.
TR20.00.01, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and
Control Instruments, Part 1: General.
International Conference on Energy Conversion and Application
(ICECA).
National Electrical Code (NEC).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b.
ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 820, Standard for Fire
Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities.
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 508A, Standard for Safety,
Industrial Control Panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Abbreviations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
B.
C.
D.
2.
3.
E.
2.
F.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
Signal Types:
1.
2.
3.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Use a qualified PIC System Integrator for at least the following Work:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
j.
k.
2.
3.
1.05
Training.
Assist Engineer with Operational Readiness Test 2 as defined in
Article Field Quality Control.
Verify following Work not by PIC System Integrator is provided:
a.
Correct type, size, and number of signal wires with their raceways.
b.
Correct electrical power circuits and raceways.
c.
Correct size, type, and number of PIC-related pipes, valves,
fittings, and tubes.
d.
Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process
mechanical piping for in-line primary elements.
NonPIC Equipment Directly Connected to PIC Equipment:
a.
Obtain from Contractor, manufacturers information on
installation, interface, function, and adjustment.
b.
Coordinate with Contractor to allow required interface and
operation with PIC.
c.
For operation and control, verify installations, interfacing signal
terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
d.
Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PIC.
e.
Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the
following:
1)
Valve operators, position switches, and controls.
2)
Chemical feed pump and feeder speed/stroke controls.
3)
Engine generator
4)
Automatic transfer switch
5)
Fire alarm control panel
6)
Motor control centers.
7)
Variable frequency drive systems.
8)
Packaged control systems.
f.
Examples of items not in this category:
1)
Internal portions of equipment provided under Division 26,
Electrical, that are not directly connected to PIC equipment.
2)
Internal portions of package system instrumentation and
controls that are not directly connected to PIC equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
B.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
Initially Completed By
Tag Number
Engineer
Loop Number
Engineer
Description
Engineer
4.
Contractor
Engineer
Setpoints
Engineer
Engineer
Engineer
c.
Submit updated version of Instrument List.
d.
Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel.
Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components.
a.
Format:
1)
Similar to ISA TR20.00.01.
2)
Microsoft Excel, one component per data sheet.
3)
Submit proposed format for Component Data Sheets before
completing data sheets for individual components.
b.
Content: Specific features and configuration data for each
component, including but not limited to:
1)
Tag Number.
2)
Component type identification code and description.
3)
Location or service.
4)
Service conditions.
5)
Manufacturer and complete model number.
6)
Size and scale range.
7)
Setpoints.
8)
Materials of construction.
9)
Options included.
10) Power requirements.
11) Signal interfaces.
12) Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturers
local office, representative, distributor, or service facility.
c.
Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
9.
Diagram Type:
1)
Ladder diagrams where applicable in a format similar to
those shown on Drawings. Include devices that are mounted
in or on the panel that require electrical connections. Show
unique rung numbers on left side of each rung.
2)
Schematic Drawings for wiring of circuits that cannot be
well represented by ladder diagrams.
d.
Item Identification: Identify each item with attributes listed.
1)
Wires: Wire number and color. Cable number if part of
multiconductor cable.
2)
Terminals: Location (enclosure number, terminal junction
box number, or MCC number), terminal strip number, and
terminal block number.
3)
Components:
a)
Tag number, terminal numbers, and location
(FIELD, enclosure number, or MCC number).
b)
Switching action (open or close on rising or falling
process variable), setpoint value and units, and
process variable description (for example, Sump Level
High).
4)
I/O Points: PLC unit number, I/O tag number, I/O address,
terminal numbers, and terminal strip numbers.
5)
Relay Coils:
a)
Tag number and its function.
b)
On right side of run where coil is located, list contact
location by ladder number and sheet number.
Underline normally closed contacts.
6)
Relay Contacts: Coil tag number, function, and coil location
(ladder rung number and sheet number).
e.
Show each circuit individually. No typical diagrams or typical
wire lists will be allowed.
f.
Ground wires, surge protectors, and connections.
g.
Wire and Cable Names: Show names and wire color
corresponding to Circuit and Raceway Schedule for circuits
entering and leaving a panel. Refer to Division 26, Electrical.
Communications and Digital Networks Diagrams:
a.
Scope: Includes connections to Ethernet network, remote I/O, and
ControlNet devices.
b.
Format: Network schematic diagrams for each different type of
network.
c.
Show:
1)
Interconnected devices, both passive and active.
2)
Device names and numbers.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C.
3)
Terminal numbers.
4)
Communication Media: Type of cable.
5)
Connection Type: Type of connector.
6)
Node and device address numbers.
7)
Wire and cable numbers and colors.
Panel Power Requirements and Heat Dissipation: For control panels
tabulate and summarize:
a.
Required voltages, currents, and phases(s).
b.
Maximum heat dissipations Btu per hour.
c.
Calculations.
d.
Steady State Temperature Calculations: For nonventilated panels,
provide heat load calculations showing the panel estimated
internal steady state temperature for ambient air temperatures of
100 degrees F.
Installation Details: Include modifications or further details required and
define installation of I&C components.
Spares, expendables, and test equipment.
Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel.
PLC I/O List:
a.
Managed by Engineer:
1)
During construction Engineer will maintain PLC I/O List
and give electronic Microsoft Excel copies to PIC System
Integrator.
2)
Engineer will assign PLC I/O points to specific chassis, slot,
and point addresses.
b.
PLC I/O List Changes: Changes to PLC I/O List reflecting actual
equipment and instrumentation provided.
1)
Mark up electronic file of latest PLC I/O List from
Engineer. Highlight changed cells with yellow, new rows
with red, and rows to be deleted with green.
2)
Submit marked up copies changes at 30-day intervals.
PLC I/O List: Submit I/O assignment and Rack/Slot/Point.
Shop Drawings for Changes Impacting PLC Programming:
a.
Submit details of changes required to PLC monitoring and control
resulting from installation of alternative or upgraded process
equipment and instrumentation, and other causes.
b.
Submit changes at 30-day intervals.
Informational Submittals:
1.
Statements of Qualification:
a.
PIC System Integrator.
b.
PIC System Integrators site representative.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
B.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.07
1.08
B.
C.
D.
Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction
environments.
B.
Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start following key Project
activities until prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been
completed and satisfied:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.09
MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
1.10
4)
DAFT building: 7 days.
PLC and HMI Shipment to Site:
a.
General Prerequisites:
1)
Approval of PIC Shop Drawings and preliminary operation
and maintenance data.
2)
FDT completed.
PLC and OWS Installation Prerequisite: Equipment received at Site.
Operational Readiness Test 1 Prerequisite: PLC and HMI installation
complete.
Operational Readiness Test 2 Prerequisite: Operational Readiness Test 1
completed.
Performance Test Prerequisite: Operational Readiness Test 2 completed
and facility started up.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
Provide PIC functions shown on Drawings and required in PIC subsections for
each system and loop. Furnish equipment items required in PIC subsections.
Furnish materials, equipment, whether indicated or not, necessary to effect
required system and loop performance.
B.
2.
C.
2.
2.02
I&C COMPONENTS
A.
B.
Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in
Instrument List referenced in Article Supplements. Furnish equipment that is
necessary to achieve required loop performance.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
2.04
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
2.
3.
B.
Standard Service Conditions for Panels and Consoles: Unless otherwise noted,
in Control Panel Schedule located in Article Supplements at End of Section,
design equipment for continuous operation in these environments:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Inside:
a.
Temperature: 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
b.
Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 95 percent noncondensing.
c.
NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.
Outside:
a.
Temperature: Minus 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
b.
Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent, rain, and snow.
c.
NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.
Outside, Hazardous:
a.
Temperature Minus 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
b.
Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing, rain, and
snow.
c.
NEC Classification: As shown on Electrical Drawings.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
B.
C.
2.
3.
E.
D.
Inscription:
a.
Refer to table under Paragraph Standard Pushbutton Colors and
Inscriptions.
b.
Refer to table under Paragraph Standard Light Colors and
Inscriptions.
c.
Refer to P&IDs on Drawings.
Materials: Stainless steel, keyed legend plates. Secured to panel by
mounting nut for pushbutton, light, or switch.
Letters: Black on gray or white background.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
2.06
2.07
2.08
2.09
B.
B.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
ac Circuits:
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: For current to be carried, but not less than No. 18 AWG.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
F.
2.
G.
Quantity:
a.
Accommodate present and spare indicated needs.
b.
Wire spare PLC I/O points to terminal blocks.
c.
One wire per terminal for field wires entering enclosures.
d.
Maximum of two wires per terminal for No. 18 AWG wire for
internal enclosure wiring.
e.
Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less
than 5 per terminal block, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
Terminal Block Types: Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and
Control Components, Part 2, Article Electrical Components.
Grounding of Enclosures:
1.
2.
Furnish isolated copper grounding bus for signal and shield ground
connections.
Ground this ground bus at a common signal ground point in accordance
with National Electrical Code requirements.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
H.
I.
K.
Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one
enclosure to another.
Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or
enclosures.
J.
General:
a.
Function: Protect elements of PIC against damage due to electrical
transients induced in interconnecting lines by lightning and nearby
electrical systems.
b.
Surge suppressors are not shown for external analog transmitters.
Determine quantity and location, and show in Shop Drawings.
Refer to example wiring in installation details in Drawings.
c.
Provide, install, coordinate, and inspect grounding of surge
suppressors at:
1)
Connection of ac power to PIC equipment including panels,
consoles assembles, and field-mounted analog transmitters
and receivers.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2)
2.
3.
2.10
PANEL FABRICATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Temperature Control:
1.
Freestanding Panels:
a.
Nonventilated Panels: Size to adequately dissipate heat from
equipment mounted inside panel and on panel.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
2.
3.
C.
Ventilated Panels:
1)
Furnish with louvers and forced ventilation as required to
prevent temperature buildup from equipment mounted
inside panel and on panel.
2)
For panels with backs against wall, furnish louvers on top
and bottom of panel sides.
3)
For panels without backs against wall, furnish louvers on
top and bottom of panel back.
4)
Louver Construction: Stamped sheet metal.
5)
Ventilation Fans:
a)
Furnish where required to provide adequate cooling.
b)
Create positive internal pressure within panel.
c)
Fan Motor Power: 120V ac, 60-Hz, thermostatically
controlled.
6)
Air Filters: Washable aluminum, Hoffman Series A-FLT.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Materials:
a.
Sheet steel, unless otherwise noted in Control Panel Schedule in
Article Supplements.
b.
Minimum Thickness: 10-gauge, unless otherwise noted.
Panel Front:
a.
Fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel, unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
b.
No seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front.
c.
Panel Cutouts: Smoothly finished with rounded edges.
d.
Stiffeners: Steel angle or plate stiffeners or both on back of panel
face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or
operation.
Internal Framework:
a.
Structural steel for instrument support and panel bracing.
b.
Permit panel lifting without racking or distortion.
Lifting rings to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during
installation.
Adjacent Panels: Securely bolted together so front faces are parallel.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
D.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Breather and Drains: Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 4 and 4X panels:
1.
F.
Door:
a.
Full height, fully gasketed access door where shown on Drawings.
b.
Latch: Three-point, Southco Type 44.
c.
Handle: D ring, foldable type.
d.
Hinges: Full-length, continuous, piano-type, steel hinges with
stainless steel pins.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
G.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Harness Wiring:
a.
120V ac: No. 14 AWG, MTW.
b.
24V dc: No. 16 AWG, MTW where individual conductors are
used and Type TC shielded tray cable where shielded wire is used.
Panelwork:
a.
No exposed connections.
b.
Allow adjustments to equipment to be made without exposing
these terminals.
c.
For power and control wiring operating above 80V ac or dc use
covered channels or EMT raceways separate from low voltage
signal circuits.
Plastic Wire Ducts Color:
a.
120V ac: White.
b.
24V dc: Gray.
c.
Communications Cables and Fiber Optic Jumpers: Orange.
Provide a communications plastic wire duct for communications cables
and fiber optic cables between the communications devices in control
panel and communications raceways. Design plastic wire duct design to
take into account the minimum bending radius of the communications
cable.
Make plastic wire ducts the same depth.
Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 inches between plastic wire ducts and
terminal blocks.
H.
I.
Factory Finishing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
e.
f.
2.11
CORROSION PROTECTION
A.
2.12
EQUIPMENT GROUPS
A.
2.13
1 PLC processor.
1 Power Supply.
1 Ethernet Communication module.
1 ControlNet Communication module.
1 Discrete output module.
1 Discrete Input module.
1 Analog Input module.
1 Analog Output module.
1 Chassis.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
B.
2.14
Scope: Inspect and test PIC to ensure it is operational, ready for FDT.
Location: PIC System Integrators facility.
Integrated Test:
a.
Interconnect and test PIC, except for primary elements and smaller
panels.
b.
Exercise and test functions.
c.
Provide stand-alone testing of smaller panels.
d.
Simulate inputs and outputs for primary elements, final control
elements, and panels excluded from test.
PART 3
3.01
Conducting Tests:
a.
Provide special testing materials and equipment.
b.
Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables,
equipment, and data.
c.
If not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and
data provide suitable means of simulation.
d.
Define simulation techniques in test procedures.
e.
Test Format: Cause and effect.
1)
Person conducting test initiates an input (cause).
2)
Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect),
occurs.
EXAMINATION
A.
For equipment not provided by PIC System Integrator, but that directly
interfaces with PIC, verify the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Proper installation.
Calibration and adjustment of positioners and I/P transducers.
Correct control action.
Switch settings and dead bands.
Opening and closing speeds and travel stops.
Input and output signals.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Mechanical Systems:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
3.03
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Onsite Supervision:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Leak Tests: During preparation for testing, conduct leak tests in accordance
with Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.
D.
Testing Sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Testing:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
g)
3.
4.
F.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
C.
3.05
TRAINING
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
2.
3.06
CLEANING
A.
3.07
General:
a.
Refer to specific requirements specified in PIC Subsections.
b.
Include review of O&M data and survey of spares, expendables,
and test equipment.
c.
Use equipment similar to that provided.
d.
Unless otherwise specified in PIC subsections, provide training
suitable for instrument technicians with at least a 2-year associate
engineering or technical degree, or equivalent education and
experience in electronics, instrumentation, or digital systems.
Maintenance Training:
a.
Training Session Duration: 3 instructor days.
b.
Number of Training Sessions: One.
c.
Location: Project Site.
d.
Course Objective: Develop skills needed for routine maintenance
of PIC.
e.
Content: Provide training for each type of component and function
provided.
1)
Component calibration.
2)
Adjustments: For example, controller tuning constants,
current switch trip points, and similar items.
3)
Troubleshooting and diagnosis for equipment and software.
4)
Replacing lamps, chart paper, and fuses.
5)
I&C components removal and replacement.
6)
Periodic preventive maintenance.
Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from interior
and exterior of equipment.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.08
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
13.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Each of the 3 gates at the influent diversion structure will have the ability to
be controlled locally through the controls within the gate actuator.
1.2.2
When selected to be in Remote, the gate will be controlled by the PCS. At the
PCS graphical screen, the operator shall be capable of selecting between
Manual and Auto. When in Manual, the operator can input the gate position
set point.
1.2.3
When selected to be in Remote and Auto, the gate will have three (3)
selections (modes): Full Open, Full Closed, and Modulating. When selected to
be full open or full closed, the PCS shall drive the gate actuator to this
position and halt.
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
At any time when in Auto, if the diversion structure water level reaches its
high high level alarm set point for a set period (initially 2 seconds), the gate
mode shall all automatically be selected to be full open (Mode change).
1.2.8
When the flow drops below an operator adjustable low flow set point for a set
period (initially set at 5 seconds), an alarm shall be displayed at the PCS. At
the same time, all gates in Auto shall move to the full open position. (This is
NOT a change in control modes.) Once the flow rate rises above the low flow
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
set point for a set period (initially 10 seconds), the gate modulating control
shall resume. The low flow alarm shall display the following alarm at the
PCS: Primary Influent Division Structure Gate Control Not Actively
Splitting Flow.
1.2.9
1.2.10 A high flow alarm shall be set at any time the flow to a given clarifier exceeds
14MGD for a set period, initially set for 30 seconds. The alarm shall be
displayed at the PCS.
1.3 Primary Influent Diversion Structure Level:
1.3.1
The water level within the primary influent division structure shall be
continuously monitored by the PCS, with indication.
1.3.2
Alarm set points for high and high high shall be operator selectable at the
PCS, with alarms being indicated.
Primary clarifier 3s existing flow meter will not be modified and is currently
monitored by the PCS.
There is an existing ferric chloride storage tank and ferric chloride feed
system. Per Citys instruction, only the metering pump will be replaced with a
larger pump with sufficient capability to control hydrogen sulfide and struvite
in the digesters during normal operation, as well as provide backup
phosphorus removal in case the intentional struvite system is out of service.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.1.2
The new peristaltic metering pump will receive RUN command and speed
signal from the plant control system. A LEAK alarm, AUTO control status,
and pump speed will be transmitted back to the Plant Control System (PCS).
3.1.3 When the pump is operated at Auto mode, the operator shall be able to
control the pump speed at Operator Work Stations (OWS) via one of these
two methods: 1) Enter a feed rate setpoint in gph. The system shall have a
calibrated pump speed vs. chemical feed rate table or plot so that the pump
speed is selected; 2) Enter a dosing rate in mg/L based on the digested sludge
flow rate. The operator shall also enter the concentration of the ferrous
chloride bulk solution. The system shall calculate the chemical feed rate using
the formula below:
Q (gph) = Dose (mg/L) x Q (mgd) / [Conc.(%) x s.g.]/24
Where, Q (gph) is ferrous chloride feed rate.
Dose (mg/L) is operator-input ferrous chloride dose.
Q (mgd) is measured thickened sludge flow rate to digesters.
Conc. (%) is the strength of the bulk solution
s.g. is the specific gravity of the bulk solution. 1.25 for ferrous chloride.
When the chemical feed rate is determined, the pump speed shall be
determined based on the calibrated pump speed vs. chemical feed rate table or
plot.
4.1.3
Flow to each aeration basin will be set by a percentage of the total primary
clarifier effluent flow. Under normal conditions the flow percentage to
Aeration Basin 1 will equal that of Aeration Basin 2, and the flow percentage
to Aeration Basin 5 will equal that of Aeration Basin 6.
4.1.4
Flow control to all Aeration Basins will be achieved by flow control valves on
the influent piping, downstream of flow meters.
4.1.5
Through the PCS the operators can set the flow percentage (for Aeration
Basin 1, 2, 5, and 6) and the flow control valves will automatically adjust to
provide the desired flow split.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Aeration Basin 1 and 2 flow split between anoxic zone 1, anaerobic zone 1,
and anoxic zone 2 is accomplished using the magnetic flow meter on the
primary effluent line entering each aeration basin and magnetic flow meters
and flow control valves to each Anoxic Zone 1 and Anerobic Zone 1. Anoxic
Zone 1 shall receive 5-10% of the total basin flow. Anaerobic Zone 1 shall
receive 30-45% of the total basin flow. And anoxic zone 2 shall receive the
rest of the flow (45-65%). The flow control valves for each of the zones
above will modulate to maintain the total aeration basin percentage of all
primary effluent flow. Aeration Basin 1 and 2 flow split will be monitored and
controlled through the PCS.
4.2.2
Aeration Basin 5 and 6 flow split between anoxic zone 1, anaerobic zone 1,
and anoxic zone 2 is accomplished using the magnetic flow meter on the
primary effluent line entering each aeration basin and magnetic flow meters
and flow control valves to each Anoxic Zone 1 and Anerobic Zone 1. Anoxic
Zone 1 shall receive 5-10% of the total basin flow. Anaerobic Zone 1 shall
receive 30-45% of the total basin flow. And anoxic zone 2 shall receive the
rest of the flow (45-65%). The flow control valve for each of the zones above
will modulate to maintain the total aeration basin percentage of all primary
effluent flow. Aeration Basin 5 and 6 flow split will be monitored and
controlled through the PCS.
New platform type mixers will be installed in Anoxic Zone 2. Normally these
mixers will run continuously.
4.3.2
Submersible mixers will be installed in Aerobic Zone 1 so that this zone may
be converted into another anoxic zone if desired. These mixers will be
manually turned on and off.
4.3.3
These mixers will be able to be monitored and controlled through the PCS.
4.4.2
There is a gate on the discharge of the mixed liquor recycle pump to keep the
process from short circuiting the aeration basin when the recycle pump is off.
The pump will be interlocked with this gate through the PCS so that it will not
start unless the gate is closed. The gate will open once the pump is running.
This will inhibit the pump from starting when the flow is moving backwards
across its impellers.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Each aeration basin shall measure influent VFLT with a magnetic flow meter.
The flow split of VFLT between Aeration Basins 1 and 2 is assumed to be
equal, as well as the flow split between Aerations Basins 5 and 6. Manual ball
valves are provided and can be positioned accordingly to ensure this equal
flow split. The PCS will monitor the flow to each aeration basin.
4.6 South Plant Mixed Liquor Pumping (Not Part of This Contract):
4.6.1
A new Mixed Liquor Transfer Pump Station will provide the ability to transfer
mixed liquor from the South Plant to the North Plant secondary clarifiers. The
Mixed Liquor pump will be controlled from a VFD. This pump will be
operated when a South Plant Clarifier is down and needs maintenance. There
will be only one pump and therefore there is no redundancy.
4.6.2
A magnetic flow meter will monitor the mixed liquor from the South Plant to
the North Plant.
4.6.3
Through the Plant Control System (PCS) an operator is able to provide a flow
set point and the VFD and pump will modulate to maintain that set point.
4.6.4
An actuated slide gate will allows isolation of the transfer pump station
wetwell.
The new fourth RAS pump is the same as the existing ones and provides
additional pumping capacity. The new pump is controlled by a VFD.
5.1.3
All 4 RAS pumps will be controlled by the PCS. Pumps are operated at the
same frequency. They are controlled to maintain a level in the wet well.
Additional pumps shall be turned on and off based on the VFD speed needed
to maintain the wet well level. For example: If 2 pumps are running at 100%
speed to maintain level than a third pump will be turned on. If 3 pumps are
running at 70% speed then one of the pumps will be shut off.
5.1.4
5.1.5
Total sludge flow pumped by the South Plant RAS Pump Station is measured
by a new flow meter in the discharge line and monitored by the Plant Control
System (PCS).
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.1.6
RAS flow split between the Aeration Basins 1 and 2, and Aerations Basins 5
& 6 is done manually at actuated butterfly valves.
5.1.7
The PCS also monitors a flood switch in the below grade RAS pump station
electrical room.
Flow meters and flow control valves will be used to equally distribute the TPS
into each fermentation tank. The flow will be monitored and controlled by the
PCS.
7.3.2
The thickened sludge will be able to bypass the fermentation facility to send it
directly to the fermented primary sludge (FPS) wet wells at the end of
fermentation tanks. From there it will be pumped to the Rotary Screen
Thickeners (RSTs).
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
The plant periodically flushes the TPS pipe with a large quantity of
geothermal water, which can negatively impact the fermentation process. The
geothermal water for flushing therefore is directed to the plant drain system
with automated valves to allow bypassing the fermentation process.
7.5.2
All three mixing pumps will be controlled with VFDs to provide additional
control adjustment to meet the fermentation process mixing needs. The
mixing pumps are monitored and controlled by the PCS.
7.5.3
Each mixing pump has an actuated valve at the discharge of each pump. These
valves function as a check valve for the mixing pumps and will be
automatically controlled from the PCS to interlock with the mixing pumps.
7.5.4
Mixing flow for each fermentation tank is measured with a magnetic flow
meter. The flow is monitored by the PCS.
Fermented primary sludge (FPS) overflow from each fermentation tank falls
into a FPS wet well. The level of each wet well is monitored by a pressure
transducer. Each fermentation tank also has a high level switch. This will alert
the operators of a high level condition in the fermentation wet well and
fermentation tanks in case there is a malfunction of the normal wet well level
sensor. In addition, there is an overflow pipe in each FPS wet well that is
connected to the plant drain system.
7.6.2
W3 water is injected into FPS wet wells. Total W3 flow into these wet wells is
measured and monitored by the PCS. The total W3 flow to both wet wells is
controlled by adjusting manual valves. It is assumed that the flow splits
equally to each wet well based on the symmetry of the piping.
7.6.3
There are two FPS pumps, one duty and one standby, that pump the FPS from
the FPS wet wells to the Thickening Facility. The two wet wells are joined by
the external pump suction line feeding the two FPS pumps. The two wet wells
are also internally joined by a gate in between to ensure that equal amount of
flows are pumped out of each wet well. The gate will be closed if any of the
fermentation tank and associated wet well needs to be taken out of service.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.6.4
The Fermented Primary Sludge Pumps are powered from VFDs and
controlled independently to maintain a level set point in the wet well that they
are pumping from. Each VFD has a hardwired interlock with a discharge high
pressure switch. This switch shuts the pump down to protect the pump from
high pressure due to a plugged line or closed valve. Each wet well also has a
secondary low level pressure switch that will alarm in case there is a
malfunction of the normal level sensor.
7.6.5
The FPS flow is pumped to the RST No. 4 that dedicated for FPS thickening.
FPS flow feeding the RST is measured by a flow meter, and monitored by the
PCS. Automated open/close valves control if the FPS is sent to RST No. 3 or
the standby RST No. 4
7.6.6
All sludge to the Rotary Screen Thickeners (RST) normally comes from the
WAS phosphate Release Tank and the Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks.
WAS or partially thickened primary sludge from the gravity thickeners can
also bypass the Phosphate Release Tank and Primary Sludge Fermentation
Tanks respectively and be routed to the thickening process.
8.1.2
There are four parallel thickening trains. Each train includes polymer
injection, flocculation tank, and rotary screen thickener. Trains 1 and 2
normally thicken the Waste Activated Sludge (WAS). Train 4 normally
thickens the Fermented Primary Sludge (FPS). Train 3 is a backup for both the
WAS and the PFS thickening.
8.1.3
Automated valves control which RSTs are used to thicken WAS or FPS.
Automated flow control valves are also available on sludge feed pipes for
RSTs 1, 2, and 3 to allow achieving of equal flow split between WAS
thickening RSTs.
8.1.4
The standby Train 3 does not need to be frequently exercised and should stay
available as a standby unit most of time. Otherwise the Train 3 may need to be
shut down and restarted to switch to a different type of sludge in event a duty
RST is out of service.
8.1.5
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
All four trains have parallel polymer injection equipment. Polymer, supplied
from new, dedicated polymer preparation systems, gets injected into and
mixed with sludge in a polymer injector and mixer..
8.2.2
Polymer flow is paced off of the sludge flow or mass feed into the thickening
train. Polymer flow control to each train is provided by a VFD controlled
polymer feed pump and a flow meter. The polymer is then further diluted to
optimize polymer activity by being mixed with a fixed amount of water before
it gets injected into the sludge.
8.2.3
Each polymer pump is monitored and controlled by the PCS to provide the
proper polymer dosage to each thickening train. A discharge high pressure
switch is hardwire interlocked with each polymer pump. A high discharge
pressure due to a closed valve or a plugged line will automatically stop the
polymer pump.
8.2.4
Polymer Feed Pump 3 is the standby backup pump for trains 1, 2, 4. The
standby pump will automatically be assigned to a functioning train if the
polymer pump for that train has failed. Therefore a failed polymer pump will
not disable a whole thickening train.
Normal Operation:
8.3.1.1 The polymer injected sludge is passed through a flocculation tank, which
is gently mixed by a floc tank mixer for sludge conditioning, and then to
the RSTs. Both the flocculation tank mixer and RST motor are powered
from VFDs and controlled from the PCS . Flocculation and RST speeds
will be manually adjusted through the PCS to provide the best thickening.
The thickened sludge on the discharge side of the RST will then fall by
gravity into the individual Thickened Sludge Hopper underneath the RST
to be pumped to the digesters..
8.3.1.2 W3 water is used by the RSTs in the thickening process to continuously
wash and clean the RST filtration mesh. The filtrate from the RSTs
thickening the WAS is rich in phosphorus and collected in the PFLT
(Phosphorus-rich Filtrate) wet well. The filtrate from the FPS is rich in
volatile fatty acids and collected in the VFLT (Volatile Fatty Acid Rich
Filtrate) wet well.
8.3.2
Locations of Control:
8.3.2.1 There will be an Operator Work Station (OWS) located in the RST room
adjacent to the RSTs so that an operator can initiate all controls needed to
operate, start, or stop a RST train while near the RSTs. The OWS have the
same access to all operator screens as the plant control system.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.3.2.2 Manual controls of individual equipment of a RST train are also available
near the equipment.
8.3.3
8.3.3.1 From the PCS/OWS turn on the RST washwater solenoid valve and start
the screen motor to wet the screens. Set the screen speed to the desired
rpm.
8.3.3.2 From the PCS/OWS start the flocculator mixer motor to establish unit run
status. Set the mixer speed to the desired rpm.
8.3.3.3 After an RST screen and mixer run status are established, from the
PCS/OWS or at the pumps, start the polymer feed pump associated with
the RST train.
8.3.3.4 Verify that the motorized valve on the filtrate pipe is open and the
motorized valve directing the filtrate to process drain is closed.
8.3.3.5 Open automated valve on the sludge pipe feeding the operating RSTs and
verify that the valve to alternative standby RST is closed.
8.3.3.6 Turn on the FPS or WAS feed pump as necessary.
8.3.3.7 If the RST being started thickens WAS, adjust as necessary flow control
valves that are located downstream of the magnetic WAS flow meters on
the sludge feed lines of two WAS thickening RSTs, to achieve an equal
WAS flow split.
8.3.4
8.3.4.1 From the PCS/OWS or at the polymer pump, shutoff polymer feed system.
8.3.4.2 Keep the automated flow control valve on and continue to feed sludge to
the RST for approximately 5 minutes until all thickened sludge is cleaned
out of the drum discharge and there is no sludge on the screen. If too much
solids carry to PFLT that may negatively impact downstream struvite
process, close the motorized valve on the PFLT pipe and open the
motorized valve on process drain to direct PFLT to plant drain system.
8.3.4.3 Stop the RST feed pump at PCS/OWS as necessary.
8.3.4.4 Keep the RST running for an additional 15-20 minutes until the screen is
clean and no solids can be seen.
8.3.4.5 Stop the RST drum motor, and close the washwater solenoid valve
through the PCS/OWS.
8.3.4.6 Stop the flocculator motor through the PCS/OWS.
8.3.4.7 If the equipment will be shut down for an extended period, drain the floc
tank by manually opening the valve on the drain line near the bottom of
the floc tank.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.3.4.8 Thickened sludge pump will be automatically stopped when a low sludge
level is sensed.
8.4 VFLT Pumping
8.4.1
8.4.2
VFLT Pump 1 and 2 will operate as a duplex pump station with each pump
sharing the run time and acting as a backup for the other pump. Normally only
one pump operates at a time.
8.4.3
High and low level switches provide backup high level and low level alarm
status for the level transmitter.
8.4.4
The VFLT pumps are on VFDs and are controlled to maintain a level set point
in the VFLT wetwell.
8.4.5
Normally the VFLT pump is pumping to the WAS Phosphate Release Facility
(WSR), North Plant aeration basins, and South Plant aeration basins. The PCS
controls the flow split so that the WSR receives a flow amount set at the PCS
that is adjustable. Additional VFLT above the needs of WSR are split between
the North Plant and South Plant Aeration Basins. Flow meters and flow
control valves are used to meet the desired flow splits and to monitor the flow
to each of the three locations.
The PFLT pumps maintain a level set point in the PFLT wet well and pump
the phosphorus rich filtrate from the Thickening Facility to the Struvite
Production Facility.
8.5.2
A pressure level transmitter monitors the wet well level and transmits the level
back to the PCS.
8.5.3
High and low level switches provide backup high level and low level alarm
status for the level transmitter.
8.5.4
PFLT Pump 1 and 2 will operate as a duplex pump station with each pump
sharing the run time and acting as a backup for the other pump. Normally only
one pump operates at a time.
8.5.5
In AUTO mode the PCS will control the pump station to maintain a level in
the wet well by modulating the pump speed therefore matching the influent
flow with the effluent flow. If the wet well level reaches a high level alarm set
point with one pump at full speed the backup pump will turn on at full speed
and will run until the wet well is at a low level set point.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.6.2
A High level switch at each thickened sludge hopper provides backup high
level alarm status for the level transmitter.
8.6.3
The Thickened Sludge pumps are on VFDs and are controlled to maintain a
sludge level range in the thickened sludge hoppers.
8.6.4
Normally Thickened Sludge pumps associated with duty RSTs are pumping,
with the Thickened Sludge pump No. 3 that is associated with RST train No. 3
as standby. If any of the duty Thickened Sludge pumps lose pumping
efficiency and needs to be serviced, the RST train No. 3 needs to be turned on,
along with Thickened Sludge pump No. 3. If the malfunction of duty
Thickened Sludge pumps occurs during night when the plant is not manned,
the sludge level in the associated hopper will overflow to adjacent sludge
hoppers to allow more response time before sludge spill would occur. High
level alarms will be sent to PCS. If sludge overflow to Thickened Sludge
Hopper No. 3 and a high level alarm is triggered, TS Feed pump No. 3 could
be turned on automatically if the pump is in the auto mode.
8.6.5
Various segments of the pump suction and discharge pipes within the
Thickening Building can be periodically flushed with a hot water flushing
system, which is installed within the building to clean debris, grease, and
other items causing the pipes to be restricted. If the entire thickened sludge
discharge pipe to digesters is plugged, flushing with large volume of hot water
can be done by connecting trucked geothermal water to the suction side of
Thickened Sludge Pumps No. 3 or No. 4 and pumping the geothermal water
through the long thickened sludge pipe line.
The gravity belt thickener is remaining to provide the ability for recuperative
thickening of partially digested sludge.
The WAS Phosphate Release Facility (WSR) consists of two redundant tanks
where WAS and VFLT are mixed and retained for a period of time to help
facilitate the phosphorus removal process.
9.2 7.1.1 VFLT and WAS enters each of the WAS Phosphate Release tanks
independently. . The flow can be diverted to Tank 1, Tank 2 or both using flow
meters and flow control valves located at the DAFT basement..WAS Phosphate
Release Tanks:
9.2.1
The WAS and VFLT is mixed in the WAS phosphate release tanks with 2
bridge mounted mixers in each tank. Normally the mixers will be run
continuously. The mixers can be operated manually or through the PCS. The
PCS will monitor the mixers ON and AUTO status.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
9.2.2
The WAS Phosphate Release Tanks can be bypass by sending the WAS to
either the GBT or the Thickening (THK) facility. This is achieved using
actuated valves located at the DAFT basement.
After the phosphate release tanks the sludge will pour into the WAS
Phosphate Release Outlet Box. The Box has isolation gates so that a WAS
phosphate release tank can be isolated for maintenance.
9.3.2
RST Feed pumps transfer sludge from the WSR outlet box to the RSTs in the
Thickening (THK) facility.
9.3.3
9.3.4
High and low level switches provide backup high level and low level alarm
status for the level transmitter.
9.3.5
RST Feed Pumps 1 and 2 will operate as a duplex pump station with each
pump sharing the run time and acting as a backup for the other pump.
Normally only one pump operates at a time. Both pumps will be controlled
from VFDs that will allow their discharge pump flow to be adjusted.
9.3.6
In AUTO mode the PCS will control the pump station to maintain a level in
the outlet box by modulating the pump speed therefore matching the influent
flow with the effluent flow. If the wet well level reaches a high level alarm set
point with one pump at full speed the backup pump will turn on at full speed
and will run until the wet well is at a low level set point.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
Tag Number
HDW-LE/LIT-20301
Component
Code
L5
HDW-FE/FIT-20321
F4
HDW-FE/FIT-20322
F4
AER-AE/AIT-P-30325
A20
AER-AE/AIT-P-30326
A20
AER-AE/AIT-30355
A20
AER-AE/AIT-P-30356
A20
AER-FE/FIT-P-30551
F4
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Component Title
LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER
ULTRASONIC
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGENTIC
Installation
Detail
Options
RANGE: 0-12 FEET
P&ID
PI-0424
PI-0424
4091-220G
PI-0424
4091-220G
PI-0432
4091-162G
PI-0435
4091-162G
PI-0432
4091-162G
PI-0435
4091-162G
PI-0428
4091-220G
Instrument List
AER-FE/FIT-P-30552
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30555
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30556
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30781
F4
AER-LSL-30781
AER-PE/PI-30781
AER-FE/FIT-P-30841
L18
P4
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30842
F4
CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 2
PI-0429
4091-220G
PI-0431
4091-220G
PI-0434
4091-220G
PI-0436
4091-220G
PI-0436
PI-0437
PI-0427
4091-248
4091-304B
4091-220G
PI-0427
4091-220G
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
AER-FE/FIT-P-30845
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30846
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30871
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30872
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30875
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30876
F4
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
PI-0430
4091-220G
PI-0433
4091-220G
PI-0427
4091-220G
PI-0427
4091-220G
PI-0430
4091-220G
PI-0433
4091-220G
Instrument List
AER-FE/FIT-P-30881
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30882
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30885
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-30886
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-35015
F4
AER-FE/FIT-P-35016
F4
SCL-LSH-P-35051
SCL-PE35101
SCL-PI-P-35101
L18
P15
P4
CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 4
RANGE: 0 TO 9 MGD
SIZE: 20 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 9 MGD
SIZE: 20 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 6 MGD
SIZE: 24 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 6 MGD
SIZE: 24 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SETPOINT: 1 INCH AFF
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
PI-0427
4091-220G
PI-0427
4091-220G
PI-0430
4091-220G
PI-0433
4091-220G
PI-0436
4091-220G
PI-0436
4091-220G
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
4091-248
4091-304C
4091-304C
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
SCL-PE35102
SCL-PI-P-35102
SCL-PE35103
SCL-PI-P-35103
SCL-PE35104
SCL-PI-P-35104
SCL-FE35141
P15
P4
P15
P4
P15
P4
F4
DFT-FE/FIT-P-35441
F4
DFT-FE/FIT-P-35442
F4
THK-PE-P-63011
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63011
THK-PE-P-63012
P4
P15
PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63012
THK-PE-P-63013
P4
P15
PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63013
THK-PE-P-63014
P4
P15
PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63014
P4
PRESSURE GAUGE
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
RANGE: 0-20,000 GPM
SIZE: 24 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: RAS
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-600 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: WAS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-600 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: WAS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-220G
PI-0441
4091-220G
PI-0441
4091-220G
PI-0448
4091-304C
PI-0448
PI-0448
4091-304C
4091-304C
PI-0448
PI-0448
4091-304C
4091-304C
PI-0448
PI-0448
4091-304C
4091-304C
PI-0448
4091-304C
Instrument List
THK-LE-P-63021
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-LSL-P-63021
P8
THK-LIT-P-63021
THK-LSH-P-63022
THK-PI-P-63031A
THK-PI-P-63031B
THK-PI-P-63032A
THK-PI-P-63032B
THK-FE/FIT-P-63041
P9
L50
P4
P4
P4
P4
F4
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
LEVEL SWITCH, VIBRONIC
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC
THK-FE/FIT-P-63042
F4
THK-FE/FIT-P-63043
F4
THK-PI-P-63051A
THK-PI-P-63051B
THK-PI-P-63052A
THK-PI-P-63052B
THK-PI-P-63053A
THK-PI-P-63053B
THK-PI-P-63054A
THK-PI-P-63054B
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 6
SIZE: 2INCH
TYPE: OFF-LINE
SETPOINT: 36 INCHES WC
PI-0451
4091-304D
PI-0451
4091-304D
RANGE: 0- 24 FEET WC
SETPOINT: EL. 2695.5
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0-160 PSI
RANGE: 0-50 PSIG
RANGE: 0- 24GPM
SIZE: 1 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0- 68 GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-86 GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
4091-304D
4091-320
4091-304A
4091-304C
4091-304A
4091-304C
4091-220G
PI-0451
4091-220G
PI-0451
4091-220G
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
THK-PE-P-63061
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63061
THK-PE-P-63062
P4
P15
PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63062
THK-FE/FIT-P-63071
P4
F4
PRESSURE GAUGE
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC
THK-FE/FIT-P-63072
F4
THK-FE/FIT-P-63073
F4
THK-FE/FIT-P-63074
F4
THK-LE-P-63081
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-LSL-P-63081
P8
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: INLINE
RANGE: 0 TO 15 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: INLINE
RANGE: 0 TO 15 PSI
RANGE: 0-262 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-262 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-262 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-187 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: OFF-LINE
SETPOINT: 48 INCHES WC
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
LEVEL SWITCH, VIBRONIC
SUSPENDED SOLIDS ANALYZER
RANGE: 0 - 24 FEET WC
SETPOINT: EL.2595.5
RANGE: 1 to 90 G/L
THK-LIT-P-63081
THK-LSH-P-63082
THK-AE/AIT-P-63091
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
P9
L50
A119
PI-0452
4091-304C
PI-0452
PI-0452
4091-304C
4091-304C
PI-0452
PI-0448
4091-304C
4091-220G
PI-0448
4091-220G
PI-0448
4091-220G
PI-0448
4091-220G
PI-0452
4091-304D
PI-0452
4091-304D
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0450
4091-304D
4091-320
4091-310
Instrument List
THK-PIT-P-63101
THK-LE-P-63111
P9
P15
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0453
PI-0450
4091-304A
4091-304C
PI-0450
4091-304C
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND
RANGE: -10 TO 10 IN WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC
THK-PE-P-63111
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-63111
THK-LSL-P-63111
P4
P8
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
THK-PSH-P-63111
P8
PI-0450
4091-304C
THK-LIT-P-63111
THK-LE-P-63112
P9
P15
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
THK-PE-P-63112
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0450
4091-304C
THK-PI-P-63112
THK-LSL-P-63112
P4
P8
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND
RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
THK-PSH-P-63112
P8
PI-0450
4091-304C
THK-LIT-P-63112
THK-LE-P-63113
P9
P15
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
THK-PE-P-63113
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0450
4091-304C
THK-PI-P-63113
THK-LSL-P-63113
P4
P8
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND
RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
THK-PSH-P-63113
P8
PI-0450
4091-304C
THK-LIT-P-63113
THK-LE-P-63114
P9
P15
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL
RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 8
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
THK-PE-P-63114
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0450
4091-304C
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC
THK-PI-P-63114
THK-LSL-P-63114
P4
P8
PI-0450
PI-0450
4091-304C
4091-304C
THK-PSH-P-63114
P8
PI-0450
4091-304C
THK-LIT-P-63114
THK-FE/FIT-P-63121
P9
F4
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC
PI-0450
PI-0447
4091-304C
4091-220G
THK-PI-P-63121
THK-PE-P-63121
P4
P6
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
PI-0447
PI-0447
4091-304B
4091-304B
THK-PSH-P-63121
P8
RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
RANGE: 0-10 GPM
SIZE: 1/2 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SETPOINT: 110 PSI
PI-0447
4091-304B
THK-FE/FIT-P-63122
F4
PI-0447
4091-220G
THK-PI-P-63122
THK-PE-P-63122
P4
P6
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
PI-0447
PI-0447
4091-304B
4091-304B
THK-PSH-P-63122
P8
PI-0447
4091-304B
THK-FE/FIT-P-63123
F4
PI-0447
4091-220G
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
THK-PI-P-63123
THK-PE-P-63123
P4
P6
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
THK-PSH-P-63123
P8
THK-FE/FIT-P-63124
F4
THK-PI-P-63124
THK-PE-P-63124
P4
P6
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
THK-PSH-P-63124
P8
THK-FIT-P-63141
F4
THK-FIT-P-63142
F4
THK-FE/FIT-P-63151
F4
THK-LSH-P-63181
THK-AE/AIT-P-63261
WSR-LSL-P-64031
L108
A119
L18
CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 10
PI-0447
PI-0447
4091-304B
4091-304B
PI-0447
4091-304B
PI-0447
4091-220G
PI-0447
PI-0447
4091-304B
4091-304B
PI-0447
4091-304B
PI-0446
4091-220G
PI-0446
4091-220G
PI-0450
4091-220G
PI-0452
PI-0448
PI-0444
4091-310
4091-248
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Instrument List
WSR-LSH-P-64032
WSR-LIT-P-64041
L18
L5
WSR-PE-P-64051
P15
WSR-PI-P-64051
WSR-PE-P-64052
P4
P15
PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL
WSR-PI-P-64052
THK-LE-P-71011
P4
P15
PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-LSL-P-71011
P8
THK-LIT-P-71011
THK-LE-71012
P9
P15
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-LSL-P-71012
P8
THK-LIT-P-71012
THK-FE/FIT-P-71021
P9
F4
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC
THK-FE/FIT-P-71022
F4
THK-PE-71041
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
THK-PI-P-71041
P4
PRESSURE GAUGE
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PI-0444
PI-0444
4091-248
4091-280
PI-0444
4091-304C
PI-0444
PI-0444
4091-304C
4091-304C
PI-0444
PI-0439
4091-304C
4091-304D
PI-0439
4091-304D
RANGE: 0- 24 FEET WC
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: OFFLINE
SETPOINT: 6 FEET WC
PI-0439
PI-0439
4091-304D
4091-304D
PI-0439
4091-304D
RANGE: 0- 24 FEET WC
RANGE: 0-2400 GPM
SIZE: 12 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: FPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-2400 GPM
SIZE: 12 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: FPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SIZE: 6 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
PI-0439
PI-0439
4091-304D
4091-220G
PI-0439
4091-220G
PI-0440
4091-304C
PI-0440
4091-304C
Instrument List
THK-PSH-P-71041
P8
SETPOINT: 50 PSI
PI-0440
4091-304C
THK-PE-71042
P15
ANNULAR SEAL
PI-0440
4091-304C
THK-PI-P-71042
THK-PSH-P-71042
P4
P8
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND
SIZE: 6 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
SETPOINT: 50 PSI
PI-0440
PI-0440
4091-304C
4091-304C
PI-0440
PI-0439
4091-310
4091-320
PI-0439
4091-320
RANGE: 1 to 50 G/L
RANGE: 0-187 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: W3
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-57.5 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: TPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-57.5 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: TPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
PI-0439
PI-0439
4091-310
4091-220G
PI-0439
4091-220G
PI-0439
4091-220G
THK-AE/AIT-P-71051
THK-LSH-P-71061
A119
L50H
THK-LSH-P-71062
L50H
THK-AE/AIT-P-71071
THK-FE/FIT-P-71121
A119
F4
THK-FE/FIT-P-71161
F4
THK-FE/FIT-P-71162
F4
CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 12
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Description
Qty.
AER-LCP-002
AER-LCP-004
Model
Manufacturer
Comments
PLC
Allen-Bradley
Existing
Processor
1756
Allen-Bradley
Existing.
1756-IF8
Allen-Bradley
1756-OF8
Allen-Bradley
PLC
Allen-Bradley
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
I/O Chassis
1756-A13
Allen-Bradley
Power Supplies
1756-PA72
Allen-Bradley
1756-CN2/B
Allen-Bradley
1756-IA16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-OW16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-IF8
Allen-Bradley
1756-OF8
Allen-Bradley
PLC
Allen-Bradley
1756-A13
Allen-Bradley
13 slot chassis
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
I/O Chassis
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Name
SCL-LCP-001
DFT-LCP-001
Description
Qty.
Model
Manufacturer
Power Supplies
1756-PA72
Allen-Bradley
1756-CN2/B
Allen-Bradley
1756-IA16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-IF8
Allen-Bradley
1756-OF8
Allen-Bradley
PLC
Allen-Bradley
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
Comments
I/O Chassis
1756-A17
Allen-Bradley
Power Supplies
1756-PA72
Allen-Bradley
1756-EN2T
Allen-Bradley
1756-CN2/B
Allen-Bradley
1756-IA16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-OW16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-IF8
Allen-Bradley
1756-OF8
Allen-Bradley
PLC
Allen-Bradley
1771-ID16
Allen-Bradley
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
120V ac Isolated Discrete Input Module
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Name
THK-LCP-001
Description
Qty.
Model
Manufacturer
Comments
system with each module.
1771-OW16
Allen-Bradley
1771-NIS
Allen-Bradley
PLC
Allen-Bradley
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
17 Slot I/O Chassis
1756-A17
Allen-Bradley
Processor
1756-L71
Allen-Bradley
Power Supplies
1756-PA72
Allen-Bradley
1756-EN2T
Allen-Bradley
1756-CN2/B
Allen-Bradley
10
1756-IA16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-OW16I
Allen-Bradley
1756-IF8
Allen-Bradley
1756-OF8
Allen-Bradley
Note 1: Where Allen-Bradley products are listed they are specified as no substitutions allowed.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Panel No.
AER-LCP-004
Requirements
Non-ventilated local control panel for
local control monitoring, and control of
equipment. Local control panel shall
incorporate:
Dimensions
H W D
FDT
Space
Heater
Serv.
Lights,
Outlets
Environment
SS
Mounting
NEMA
Freestanding
12
72
60
24
Yes
No
Yes
No
Freestanding
12
90
36
24
Yes
No
Yes
Inside
No
1. PLC
2. Door mounted industrial
touchscreen PC (AER-OWS-1).
3. Wire terminations, power
supplies, isolation relays, surge
protection,and other components
required to provide complete
PICS.
4. Provide power distribuition with
control panel using circuit
breakers and/or fused terminal
blocks.
SCL-LCP-001
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Panel No.
Requirements
PICS.
FDT
Space
Heater
Serv.
Lights,
Outlets
Environment
SS
Mounting
NEMA
Dimensions
H W D
Wall
4X
36 30 16
No
No
Outlet
Inside, Wet
Yes
Freestanding
12
90 144 24
Yes
No
Yes
Inside, A/C
No
THK-LCP-001
(Use only
72 of
width. 72
of space
reserved for
future
expansion)
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Panel No.
Requirements
Mounting
NEMA
Dimensions
H W D
FDT
Space
Heater
Serv.
Lights,
Outlets
Environment
SS
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Description
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AO
AO
AO
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Zero State/
Low Range
0 XX.X Ft
0%
0%
0%
0
0
0
St
Pt
Address
PLC-01
100% PLC-01
100% PLC-01
100% PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
1 PLC-01
1 PLC-01
1 PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PID
I/O
Description
PRE-PMP-P-20311MO
PRE-PMP-P-20311PV
PRE-PMP-P-20311YA
PRE-PMP-P-20311RN
PRE-PMP-P-20311AU
PI-0426
PI-0426
PI-0426
PI-0426
PI-0426
AO
AI
DI
DO
DI
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Zero State/
Low Range
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED
FAULT
NORMAL
RUN COMMAND OFF
AUTO STATUS
MANUAL
0%
0%
St
Pt
Address
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PID
I/O Description
Zero State/
Low Range
One State/
PLC
High Range Address Rk St Pt Address
AER-FCV-30845RE
AER-FCV-30875RE
AER-FCV-30885RE
AER-MIX-P-30815AON
AER-MIX-P-30815AAU
AER-MIX-P-30815BON
AER-MIX-P-30815BAU
AER-MIX-P-30855AON
AER-MIX-P-30855AYA
AER-MIX-P-30855ARE
AER-MIX-P-30855BON
AER-MIX-P-30855BYA
AER-MIX-P-30855BRE
AER-PMP-P-30825ON
AER-PMP-P-30825YA
AER-PMP-P-30825ON
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-FCV-30846RE
AER-FCV-30876RE
AER-FCV-30886RE
AER-MIX-P-30816AON
AER-MIX-P-30816AAU
AER-MIX-P-30816BON
AER-MIX-P-30816BAU
AER-MIX-P-30855AON
AER-MIX-P-30855AYA
AER-MIX-P-30855ARE
AER-MIX-P-30855BON
AER-MIX-P-30855BYA
AER-MIX-P-30855BRE
AER-PMP-P-30825ON
AER-PMP-P-30825YA
AER-PMP-P-30825ON
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AER-GTE-P-30835OP
AER-GTE-P-30835CL
AER-GTE-P-30835RE
AER-FV-35151CL
AER-FV-35151OP
AER-FV-35151RE
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
NOT OPENED
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPENED
LOCAL
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-GTE-P-30835OP
AER-GTE-P-30835CL
AER-GTE-P-30835RE
AER-FCV-39101AV
AER-FV-35152CL
AER-FV-35152OP
AER-FV-35152RE
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0442
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AND CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2
OPENED
CLOSED
REMOTE
CLOSED
OPENED
REMOTE
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AER-MIX-P-30815ARN
AER-MIX-P-30815BRN
AER-MIX-P-30855ARN
AER-MIX-P-30855BRN
AER-PMP-P-30825RN
AER-GTE-P-30835RC
AER-GTE-P-30835RO
AER-FV-35151RC
AER-FV-35151RO
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0437
PI-0437
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-MIX-P-30816ARN
AER-MIX-P-30816BRN
AER-MIX-P-30856ARN
AER-MIX-P-30856BRN
AER-PMP-P-30826RN
AER-GTE-P-30836RC
AER-GTE-P-30835RO
AER-FV-35152RC
AER-FV-35152RO
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0437
PI-0437
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AER-FIT-30845PV
AER-FCV-30845PV
AER-FIT-30875PV
AER-FCV-30875PV
AER-FIT-30885PV
AER-FCV-30885PV
AER-FIT-30555PV
AER-FIT-30781PV
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0431
PI-0436
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM%
0 GPM
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
XX GPM
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-FIT-30846PV
AER-FCV-30846PV
AER-FIT-30876PV
AER-FCV-30876PV
AER-FIT-30886PV
AER-FCV-30886PV
AER-FIT-30556PV
AER-FCV-39101PV
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0434
PI-0442
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM%
0% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-FCV-30845MO
AER-FCV-30875MO
AER-FCV-30885MO
AER-FCV-39101MO
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0442
AND CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
TBD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PID
I/O Description
Zero State/
Low Range
One State/
PLC
High Range Address Rk St Pt Address
AER-FCV-30841RE
AER-FCV-30881RE
AER-FCV-30871RE
AER-GTE-P-30781OP
AER-GTE-P-30781CL
AER-LSL-30781YA
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0436
PI-0436
PI-0436
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
-
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
LOW
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-FCV-30842RE
AER-FCV-30882RE
AER-FCV-30872RE
AER-FIT-30552PV
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0428
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
0 GPM
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
XX GPM
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AER-FCV-30841PV
AER-FIT-30841PV
AER-FIT-30881PV
AER-FCV-30881PV
AER-FIT-30871PV
AER-FCV-30871PV
AER-FIT-30551PV
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0428
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-FCV-30842PV
AER-FIT-30842PV
AER-FIT-30882PV
AER-FCV-30882PV
AER-FIT-30872PV
AER-FCV-30872PV
AER-FIT-30552PV
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0428
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AER-FCV-30841MO
AER-FCV-30881MO
AER-FCV-30871MO
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
TBD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PID
I/O Description
Zero State/
Low Range
One State/
PLC
High Range Address Rk St Pt Address
WSR-MX-P-64021AU
WSR-MX-P-64021ON
WSR-MX-P-64022AU
WSR-MX-P-64022ON
WSR-GTE-P-64061OP
WSR-GTE-P-64061CL
WSR-LSL-64031YA
WSR-LSH-64032YA
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0444
PI-0444
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
WAS MIXER 1
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 1
OFF
WAS MIXER 2
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 2
OFF
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 1 NOT OPENED
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 1 NOT CLOSED
WAS PHOS OUTLET BOX LEVEL LOW
WAS PHOS OUTLET BOX LEVEL HIGH
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
OPENED
CLOSED
LOW
HIGH
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
WSR-MX-P-64023AU
WSR-MX-P-64023ON
WSR-MX-P-64024AU
WSR-MX-P-64024ON
WSR-GTE-P-64062OP
WSR-GTE-P-64062CL
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
WAS MIXER 3
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 3
OFF
WAS MIXER 4
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 4
OFF
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 2 NOT OPENED
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 2 NOT CLOSED
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
OPENED
CLOSED
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
WSR-MX-P-64021RN
RUN
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
STOP
PI-0443 DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
WAS MIXER 2
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STOP
RUN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
WSR-MX-P-64023RN
WSR-MX-P-64024RN
STOP
STOP
RUN
RUN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0444
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
0 FT
XX FT
0 GPM
0 FT
XX FT
XX FT
XX GPM
XX FT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
Tag Number
DFT-FV-P-35421OP
DFT-FV-P-35421CL
DFT-FV-P-35421RE
DFT-FV-P-35431OP
DFT-FV-P-35431CL
DFT-FV-P-35431RE
DFT-FCV-P-34441AV
DFT-FCV-P-34442AV
DFT-FV-P-35451RE
DFT-FV-P-35451OP
DFT-FV-P-35451CL
DFT-FV-P-35421RC
DFT-FV-P-35421RO
DFT-FV-P-35431RC
DFT-FV-P-35431RO
DFT-FV-P-35451RC
DFT-FV-P-35451RO
DFT-FIT-P-34441PV
DFT-FCV-P-34441PV
DFT-FIT-P-34442PV
DFT-FCV-P-34442PV
DFT-FCV-P-34441MO
DFT-FCV-P-34442MO
PID
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
I/O
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
AI
AI
AI
AI
AO
AO
Description
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE OPEN STATUS
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE CLOSED STATUS
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE REMOTE STATUS
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE OPEN STATUS
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE REMOTE STATUS
WAS TO WSR TANK 1 FCV AVAILABLE
WAS TO WSR TANK 2 FCV AVAILABLE
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE REMOTE STATUS
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE OPEN STATUS
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE CLOSED STATUS
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE OPEN COMMAND
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE OPEN COMMAND
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE OPEN COMMAND
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
WAS FLOW TO WSR TANK 1
WAS TO WSR TANK 1 FCV POSITION
WAS FLOW TO WSR TANK 2
WAS TO WSR TANK 2 FCV POSITION
WAS TO WSR TANK 1 FCV POSITION CONTROL
WAS TO WSR TANK 2 FCV POSITION CONTROL
Zero State/
Low Range
One State/High
Range
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
AVAILABLE
AVAILABLE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
600 GPM
100%
600 GPM
100%
100%
100%
0 GPM
0%
0 GPM
0%
0%
0%
PLC
Address
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
Address
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PID
I/O Description
Zero State/
Low Range
THK-FCV-71161AV
THK-GTE-P-71111OP
THK-GTE-P-71111CL
THK-FV-71031OP
THK-FV-71031CL
THK-FV-71031RE
THK-FV-71032OP
THK-FV-71032CL
THK-FV-71032RE
THK-FIT-63071PV
THK-FCV-63071PV
THK-FCV-63071RE
THK-FV-63011BRE
THK-FV-63011BOP
THK-FV-63011BCL
THK-PSH-71041HI
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0440
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
CLOSED
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
-
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
OPEN
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
HIGH
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FCV-71162AV
THK-GTE-P-71112OP
THK-GTE-P-71112CL
THK-GTE-P-71081OP
THK-GTE-P-71081CL
THK-FV-71033OP
THK-FV-71033CL
THK-FV-71033RE
THK-FV-71121OP
THK-FIT-63072PV
THK-FCV-63072PV
THK-FCV-63072RE
THK-FV-63012BRE
THK-FV-63012BOP
THK-FV-63012BCL
THK-PSH-71042HI
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0440
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPENED
0 GPM
CLOSED
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
-
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
XX GPM
OPEN
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
HIGH
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FIT-63074
THK-FCV-63074RE
0 GPM
LOCAL
XX GPM
REMOTE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0450
PI-0450
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
-
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FIT-63073PV
THK-FCV-63073PV
THK-FCV-63073RE
THK-FV-63013BRE
THK-FV-63013BOP
THK-FV-63013BCL
THK-FV-63172OP
THK-FV-63172CL
THK-FV-63172RE
THK-LSL-63081LO
THK-LSL-63112LO
THK-PSH-63112HI
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0452
PI-0450
PI-0450
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
0 GPM
CLOSED
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
-
XX GPM
OPEN
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
LOW
LOW
HIGH
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FV-63271OP
THK-FV-63271CL
THK-FV-63271RE
THK-FV-63273OP
THK-FV-63273CL
THK-FV-63273RE
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FV-63272OP
THK-FV-63272CL
THK-FV-63272RE
THK-FV-63274OP
THK-FV-63274CL
THK-FV-63274RE
THK-FV-63282OP
THK-FV-63282CL
THK-FV-63282RE
THK-FV-63221OP
THK-FV-63221CL
THK-FV-63221RE
THK-FV-63211OP
THK-FV-63211CL
THK-FV-63211RE
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FV-63231OP
THK-FV-63231CL
THK-FV-63231RE
THK-FV-63241OP
THK-FV-63241CL
THK-FV-63241RE
THK-FIT-63121PV
THK-FV-63243OP
THK-FV-63243CL
THK-FV-63243RE
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
THK-FV-63232OP
THK-FV-63232CL
THK-FV-63232RE
THK-FV-63242OP
THK-FV-63242CL
THK-FV-63242RE
THK-FIT-63122PV
THK-FV-63244OP
THK-FV-63244CL
THK-FV-63244RE
THK-FIT-63124PV
THK-LSH-63022HI
THK-FCV-63043AV
THK-LSL-63114LO
PI-0447
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0450
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
0 GPM
-
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
-
XX GPM
LOW
AVAILABLE
LOW
HIGH
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
HIGH
AVAILABLE
LOW
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
HIGH
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
14
15
TBD
TBD
THK-GEN-E-1YA
THK-GEN-E-1RN
THK-FACP-1YA
THK-FACP-1YA
THK-FACP-1YA
THK-ATS-E-1SB
THK-ATS-E-1NM
THK-LSL-P-71011LO
THK-LSL-P-71012LO
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0439
PI-0439
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
STANDBY GENERATOR
STANDBY GENERATOR
FIRE ALARM PANEL
FIRE ALARM PANEL
FIRE ALARM PANEL
AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH
AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH
FERMENTED WET WELL 1 LOW LEVEL ALARM
FERMENTED WET WELL 2 LOW LEVEL ALARM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
NORMAL
OFF
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
ALARM
RUNNING
SUPERVISORY
FAULT
ALARM
STANDBY
NORMAL
ALARM
ALARM
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FCV-71161MO
THK-FV-71031RC
THK-FV-71031RO
THK-FV-71032RC
THK-FV-71032RO
THK-FV-63171RO
THK-FV-63171RC
THK-FCV-63071MO
THK-FV-63011BRC
THK-FV-63011BRO
THK-FCV-63074RO
THK-FCV-63074RC
THK-FV-63014BRC
THK-FV-63014BRO
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
0% OPEN
0% OPEN
-
100% OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
100% OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FCV-71162MO
0% OPEN
100% OPEN
THK-PLC-001
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
THK-FV-63051RC
THK-FV-63271RO
THK-FV-63271RC
THK-FV-63053RC
THK-FV-63273RO
THK-FV-63273RC
THK-FV-63201RO
THK-FV-63201RC
THK-FV-63281RO
THK-FV-63281RC
THK-FV-63191RO
THK-FV-63191RC
THK-FV-63231RO
THK-FV-63231RC
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0447
PI-0447
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
0% OPEN
0% OPEN
-
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
100% OPEN
100% OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
THK-FV-63052RC
THK-FV-63272RO
THK-FV-63272RC
THK-FV-63054RC
THK-FV-63274RO
THK-FV-63274RC
THK-FV-63282RO
THK-FV-63282RC
THK-FV-63221RO
THK-FV-63221RC
THK-FV-63211RO
THK-FV-63211RC
THK-FV-63232RO
THK-FV-63232RC
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0447
PI-0447
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
THK-AIT-71071PV
THK-FIT-71161PV
THK-FCV-71161PV
THK-LSH-71061HI
THK-FIT-71021PV
THK-LIT-71011PV
THK-AIT-71051PV
THK-FIT-63141
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0440
PI-0446
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
0 G/L
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0% HIGH
0 GPM
0 FT%
0 G/L%
0 GPM
XX G/L
XX GPM
100% OPEN
100% HIGH
XX GPM
XX FT
XX G/L
XX GPM
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0446
PI-0451
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0% HIGH
0 GPM
0 FT
0 GPM
0 GPM
0 GPM
XX GPM
100% OPEN
100% HIGH
XX GPM
XX FT
XX GPM
XX GPM
XX GPM
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-LIT-63021PV
THK-FIT-63041PV
THK-FCV-63041PV
THK-LIT-63081PV
THK-LIT-63111PV
THK-LIT-63113PV
THK-FIT-63151PV
THK-AIT-63091PV
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0452
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-0450
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0 FT
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 FT
0 FT
0 FT
0 GPM
0 GRAM/L
XX FT
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX FT
XX FT
XX FT
XX GPM
XX GRAM/L
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-FIT-63043PV
THK-FCV-63043PV
THK-PIT-63101PV
THK-LIT-63112PV
THK-LIT-63114PV
THK-AIT-63261
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0453
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-448
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 LB/SQFT
0 FT
0 FT
0 G/L
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX LB/SQFT
XX FT
XX FT
90 G/L
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
TBD
TBD
THK-FCV-71161MO
THK-FCV-63041MO
0% OPEN
0% OPEN
100% OPEN
100% OPEN
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
0% OPEN
0% OPEN
100% OPEN
100% OPEN
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
CH2M HILL
Rev.06.05.92
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Measure, locally indicate, and transmit RAS flow to LP-10.
2. At LP-10 indicate flow and provide flow control by modulation of FCV-10-2.
3. Provide high RAS flow alarm on LP-10.
Tag ID
Checked
Installation
FE/FIT-10-2
Jan-12-90 DWM
Jan-12-90 DWM
Feb-7-90 DWM
Mar-5-90 DWM
FIC-10-2
Jan-12-90 DWM
Jan-12-90 DWM
Mar-5-90 DWM
Apr-4-90 DWM
May-4-90 VDA
FSH-10-2
Jan-12-90 DWM
Jan-12-90 DWM
Mar-5-90 DWM
Apr-4-90 DWM
May-7-90 VDA
FAH-10-2
Jan-12-90 DWM
Jan-12-90 DWM
Mar-5-90 DWM
Apr-4-90 DWM
May-7-90 VDA
FCV-10-2
Mar-2-90 DWM
Mar-2-90 DWM
Apr-20-90 DWM
Apr-30-90 DWM
May-16-90 VDA
Date: May-18-90
Tag Number
Termination
Wiring
Termination
Tubing
N.A.
Calibration
May-6-90 VDA
REMARKS: None.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CH2M HILL
MANUFACTURER
Rev.06.05.92
PROJECT
Code: A7
Number: WDC30715.B2
Model: 12429-3-2-1-7
Serial #: 11553322
FUNCTIONS
Indicate? Y
Record? N
Transmit/
Convert? Y
RANGE
Chart:
VALUE
UNITS
Scale:
1-14
pH units
Input:
Output:
REQUIRED
Input
Indicated
COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? N
Describe:
1-14
pH units
4-20
mA dc
ANALOG CALIBRATIONS
AS CALIBRATED
Output
Increasing Input
Decreasing Input
Indicated
Output
Indicated
Output
Number
1.0
1.0
4.0
1.0
4.0
1.0
3.9
1.
2.3
2.3
5.6
2.2
5.5
2.3
5.6
2.
7.5
7.5
12.0
7.5
11.9
7.5
12.0
3.
12.7
12.7
18.4
12.7
18.3
12.6
18.3
4.
14.0
14.0
20.0
14.0
20.0
14.0
20.0
5.
D:
CONTROL? N
Action? direct / reverse
Modes? P / I / D
SWITCH? N
Unit Range:
Differential:
fixed/adjustable
Reset? automatic / manual
DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS
Note
REQUIRED
AS CALIBRATED
No.
Trip Point
Reset Pt.
Trip Point
Reset Pt.
N.A.
N.A.
1.
6.
Component Calibrated and Ready
for Start-up
By: J.D. Sewell
Date: Jun-6-92
Tag No.: AIT-12-6[pH]
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
CH2M HILL
Rev.06.05.92
PARTS
Body
Type: Vee-Ball
Size: 4-inch
Model: 1049763-2
Serial #: 1003220
Model: 4060D
Travel: 3-inch
Serial #: 2007330
Model: 20472T
Serial #: 102010
Pilot
Action:
Mfr:
Solenoid
Rating: None
Model:
I/P
Input: 4-20 mA dc
Mfr: Taylor
Converter
Model: 10-T-576-3
Action: Direct
Serial #: 1057-330
Position
Switch
Model: 1049-67-3
Operator
Positioner
Serial #:
Type: Pneumatic
Supply
Potential: 40 psi
Model: 3210D
Serial #: 1107063
ADJUSTMENTS
Initial
Date
VERIFICATION
Initial
Date
Air Set
JDS
Jun-06-92
Valve Action
JDS
Jun-03-92
Positioner
JDS
Jun-06-92
Installation
JDS
Jun-03-92
Position Switches
JDS
Jun-06-92
Wire Connection
JDS
Jun-04-92
I/P Converter
JDS
Jun-07-92
Tube Connection
JDS
Jun-04-92
Actual Speed
JDS
Jun-07-92
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Rev.06.05.92
Project No.:
SFO12345.C1
Jun-20-92 BDG
Jun-6-92 BDG
Jun-6-92 BDG
Jun-6-92 BDG
H(measured)
10
15
Q(computed)
Q(FIT indicator)
48.1
137
253
Q(LI on LP-521-1)
48.2
138
254
Q(display by CCS)
48.1
136.2 252.4
Forms/Sheets Verified
By
Date
Loop Accepted By
Owner
J.D. Sewell
May-18-92
J.D. Sewell
May-18-92
Date: Jun-6-92
N.A.
Performance Test
By
Date
Performed
Jun-6-92
Witnessed
B. DeGlanville
Jun-6-92
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 91 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
All other Part 2 articles cover components that are referenced by Instrument
Lists in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, or
by specific component numbers in other PIC subsections.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 1
8.
B.
C.
3.
2.
3.
4.
E.
ON/OFF Valves:
1.
2.
D.
Test Tap:
1.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
F.
G.
2.
H.
2.03
Compression Type:
a.
Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged
bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, flareless.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Parker Flodar; BA Series.
2)
Swagelok tube fittings.
3)
Parker CPI tube fittings; Parker A-LOK dual ferrule tube
fittings.
Socket Weld Type:
a.
Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged
bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, 3,000 psi maximum
working pressure, safety factor 4:1.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
Cajon.
2)
Swagelok.
3)
Parker WELDLOK.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
General:
a.
Connection Type: Screw compression clamp.
b.
Compression Clamp:
1)
Complies with DIN-VDE 0611.
2)
Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves that penetrate
wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection.
3)
Guides strands of wire into terminal.
c.
Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking.
d.
Current Bar: Copper or treated brass.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 3
e.
2.
3.
4.
Insulation:
1)
Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 degrees C to plus
110 degrees C.
2)
Two funneled shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry.
f.
Mounting:
1)
Standard DIN rail.
2)
Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without
displacing adjacent blocks.
3)
End Stops: Minimum of one at each end of rail.
g.
Wire Preparation: Stripping only permitted.
h.
Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on
terminal or rail.
i.
Marking System:
1)
Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block.
2)
Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags.
3)
Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops.
4)
Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown
on panel control diagrams and loop diagrams.
5)
Fuse Marking for Fused Terminal Blocks: Fuse voltage and
amperage rating shown on top of terminal block.
Terminal Block, General Purpose:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 30 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 24 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
g.
Test Sockets: One screw test socket 0.079-inch diameter.
h.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.T.
Terminal Block, Ground:
a.
Wire Size: 24 AWG to 10 AWG.
b.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
c.
Color: Green and yellow body.
d.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
e.
Grounding: Electrically grounded to mounting rail.
f.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P.
Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 10 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body, orange switch.
f.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
g.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SNT.
Terminal Block Diode:
a.
Rated Voltage: 24V dc.
b.
Rated Current: 30 ma.
c.
Wire Size: 16 AWG.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: Phoenix Contact ST-IN.
Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V dc.
b.
Rated Current: 25 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches.
g.
Indication: LED diode 24V dc.
h.
Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum.
i.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type ML10/13.SFD.
Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 25 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches.
g.
Indication: Neon lamp, 110V ac.
h.
Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum.
i.
Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum.
j.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type ML10/13.SFL.
Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac, High Current:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 35 amps.
c.
Wire Size: 18 AWG to 8 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 8 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray.
f.
Fuse: 13/32 inch by 1.5 inches.
g.
Spacing: 0.95 inch, maximum.
h.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type MB10/24.SF.
Relays:
1.
General:
a.
Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket.
b.
Relay Enclosure: Furnish dust cover.
c.
Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 5
2.
3.
C.
d.
Socket Mounting: Rail.
e.
Provide holddown clips.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:
a.
Type: Compact general purpose plug-in.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac, and 6.6A at 240V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac).
g.
Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations.
h.
Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations.
i.
Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp.
j.
Push-to-test button.
k.
Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay:
a.
Type: Adjustable time delay relay.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 30V dc or 277V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Operating Temperature: Minus 10 degrees C to 55 degrees C.
g.
Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent.
h.
Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall
between 20 percent to 80 percent of range.
i.
Time Delay Setpoint: As noted or shown.
j.
Mode of Operation: As noted or shown.
k.
Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to
dust cover.
l.
Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield; Series CB for
0.1-second to 100-minute delay time ranges, Series CK for
0.1-second to 120-second delay time ranges.
Surge Suppressors:
1.
General:
a.
Construction: First-stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and
second-stage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series
impedance; includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal.
b.
Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum.
c.
Recovery: Automatic.
d.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C.
e.
Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
D.
Power Supplies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 7
E.
2.
2.04
I&C COMPONENTS
A.
2.
3.
4.
General:
a.
Function: Continuous measurement of dissolved oxygen (DO)
concentration of process fluid.
b.
Type: Luminescent or fluorescence sensor.
c.
Parts: Element (sensor), transmitter (analyzer), external power
supply, interconnecting cable, mounting hardware, and ancillaries.
Performance:
a.
Range: 0 to 20 ppm.
b.
Sensor Accuracy:
1)
Measurement: plus or minus 0.2 percent of span.
2)
Temperature: plus or minus 0.2 degrees C.
c.
Response Time: Less than 40 seconds to 90 percent of value upon
step change.
Element:
a.
Luminescent or fluorescent sensor.
b.
Process Temperature Range: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F.
c.
Submersion Depth: 350 feet maximum.
d.
Sensor Cable: Integral 33 feet of cable. Provide additional length
as required.
e.
Junction Box: Provide junction or termination box and extension
cable as required.
f.
Mounting: 1-1/2 UNF - 12 UNF thread.
Transmitter:
a.
Display:
1)
Graphic dot matrix LCD to display DO.
2)
Auxiliary Readout:
a)
Temperature.
b)
Diagnostic warnings.
c)
Error messages.
d)
Other information.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
5.
6.
B.
Ambient Conditions:
1)
Temperature minus 4 degrees F to plus 140 degrees F.
2)
Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, relative, noncondensing.
c.
Signal Interface:
1)
Analog Output:
a)
Two isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc for load impedance
up to 500 ohms.
b)
Either output configurable for DO or temperature.
2)
Relay Outputs:
a)
Three SPST; 5 amps resistive,
115V ac/230V ac/30V dc.
b)
Each relay assignable to either DO or temperature.
c)
Function:
(1) Control: Settings for fail safe on/off, high/low
phasing, setpoint, deadband, and on/off displays.
(2) Alarm: Settings for fail safe on/off, high alarm
point, high alarm point deadband, low alarm
point, low alarm point deadband, and on/off
relays.
3)
Serial Communication: If and as noted.
d.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X/IP66 polycarbonate/aluminum.
e.
Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal
pipe, and vertical pipe mounting.
f.
Power Requirements: 120V ac, 60-Hz.
g.
Stainless steel equipment tag.
Accessories:
a.
Unless otherwise noted, provide submersion mounting hardware
and mounting bracket as required to perform appropriate
installation.
b.
Provide sun shield for transmitter display.
Manufacturers and Products: Hach; sc200 LDO Analysis System.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Function: Measure indicate and transmit total phosphorus in waste
water.
b.
Type: Sampling
Performance:
a.
Measurement Range: [xxxx]
b.
Response Time: [xxx]
Service:
a.
Secondary Effluent:
1)
Process Temperature: 40 to 80 degrees F
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 9
4.
5.
C.
2)
Total Suspended solids: XX to XX g/L
Interfaces:
a.
Electrical:
b.
Control:
c.
Plumbing:
Manufacturer and Model:
a.
ASA Analytics; ChemScan 4100.
b.
Or equal.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General:
a.
Function: Measure indicate and transmit suspended solids in
wastewater.
b.
Type: Inline.
Performance:
a.
Measurement Range: 1 to 100 g/L, sludge, user-selectable.
b.
Response Time: 1 to 300 seconds adjustable.
Service:
a.
Thickened primary sludge.
b.
Thickened sludge
c.
Operating Temperature:
1)
Probe: 32 to 120 degrees F.
2)
Transmitter: 32 to 120 degrees F.
Element:
a.
Probe:
1)
Stainless steel housing.
2)
Back-scatter photo receptor to detect light at 140 degrees to
the transmitted light beam; to measure suspended solids in
heavily located sample streams.
3)
Self-cleaning wiper system.
Transmitter:
a.
Displays measured variable.
b.
Menu driven operation.
c.
Graphics display.
d.
Programmable to display hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly
progress lines.
e.
Enclosure Dimension: 6H x 6W x 8D inches, nominal.
f.
Power Supply: 115V ac, 50/60 Hz.
g.
Signal Interface:
1)
Output: 4 to 20 mA dc signal for load impedance up to
0-500 ohms without load adjustments.
Cable Length: As required.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
8.
9.
D.
Miscellaneous:
a.
Calibration: Sample specific, based on gravimetric TS analysis.
Accessories (for each unit provided):
a.
Pipe insertion mounting hardware.
b.
Replacement wiper blades, 1 package of 10.
Manufacturer and Product Model: Hach Suspended Solids, Probe and
Controller, Highline-SC, 115 V ac; SC-200 Controller.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a conductive
process liquid in a full pipe.
b.
Type:
1)
Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on
Faradays Law, utilizing the pulsed dc type coil excitation
principle with high impedance electrodes.
2)
Full bore meter with magnetic field traversing entire flowtube cross section.
3)
Unacceptable are insert magmeters or multiple single point
probes inserted into a spool piece.
c.
Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, and
mounting hardware. Other parts as noted.
Service:
a.
Stream Fluid:
1)
As noted.
2)
Suitable for liquids with a minimum conductivity of
5 microS/cm and for demineralized water with a minimum
conductivity of 20 microS/cm.
b.
Flow Stream Descriptions: If and as described below.
Operating Temperature:
a.
Element:
1)
Ambient: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless
otherwise noted.
2)
Process: Minus 5 to 170 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise
noted.
b.
Transmitter:
1)
Ambient: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless
otherwise noted.
2)
Storage: 15 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise
noted.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 11
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Performance:
a.
Flow Range: As noted.
b.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting
from pipe velocities of 2 to 30 feet per second.
c.
Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at
minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second.
Features:
a.
Zero stability feature to eliminate the need to stop flow to check
zero alignment.
b.
No obstructions to flow.
c.
Very low pressure loss.
d.
Measures bi-directional flow.
Process Connection:
a.
Meter Size (diameter inches): As noted.
b.
Connection Type: 150-pound ANSI raised-face flanges;
AWWA C207, Table 2 Class D; or wafer style depending on
meter size, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Flange Material: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted.
Power (Transmitter): 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise noted.
Element:
a.
Meter Tube Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise noted.
b.
Liner Material: Teflon, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Liner Protectors: Covers (or grounding rings) on each end to
protect liner during shipment.
d.
Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the
manufacturer for the noted stream fluid.
e.
Electrode Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, unless
otherwise noted.
f.
Grounding Ring:
1)
Required, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Quantity: Two, unless otherwise noted.
3)
Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.
g.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted.
h.
Submergence:
1)
Temporary: Unless noted otherwise.
2)
Continuous (up to 10 feet depth), NEMA 6P/IP68: If noted.
i.
Direct Buried (3 to 10 feet): If noted.
j.
Hazardous Area Certification:
1)
Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D: If noted.
2)
Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and FM approved:
If noted.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 12
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3)
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 13
14.
15.
16.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 14
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
e.
f.
E.
2.
3.
4.
General:
a.
Function: Continuous, noncontacting level measurement.
b.
Type: Ultrasonic.
c.
Parts: Element, transmitter, interconnecting cable, and accessories
as noted.
Service:
a.
Application: If and as noted.
b.
Vapor Space Pressure: Atmospheric, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Operating Temperature Range:
1)
Element: Minus 4 degrees F to plus 149 degrees F.
2)
Transmitter: Minus 4 degrees F to 113 degrees F.
Performance:
a.
Range: As noted.
b.
Zero Reference: As noted.
c.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of maximum range or
6 mm, whichever is greater.
d.
Resolution: 0.1 percent of range or 2 mm, whichever is greater.
e.
Blanking Distance: Sensor dependent, typically 1 foot.
Element:
a.
NEMA 6P waterproof.
b.
Housing: PVDF, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Other materials subject to Engineer approval.
c.
Facing: None, unless otherwise noted.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 15
d.
5.
6.
7.
8.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 16
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type:
1)
Direct-acting, float with enclosed, encapsulated switch and
integral cable.
2)
Mercury free.
Service (Liquid): Wastewater, unless otherwise noted.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint: As noted.
b.
Differential: 5 inches maximum.
c.
Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 160 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Entire Assembly: Watertight and impact-resistant.
b.
Float:
1)
Material and Size: 5.5-inch diameter polypropylene.
c.
Cable:
1)
Length as noted or as necessary per mounting requirements.
2)
Plastic-jacketed cable, oil-resistant, and suitable for
continuous service.
d.
Mounting: Pipe, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Pipe Mounting:
a)
Cable clamp, suitable for connection to 1-inch pipe.
b)
Pipe-to-wall bracket, suitable for connection to 1-inch
pipe.
2)
Anchor Mounting Kit: If noted.
a)
15-pound vinyl-coated cast-iron anchor.
b)
1/8-inch, Type 316 stainless steel wire rope.
c)
Stainless steel cable clips.
Signal Interface:
a.
Switch Type: Magnetic reed.
b.
Switch Contacts:
1)
Isolated, rated at least 0.8 amp continuous at 120V ac.
2)
Contact Type: Either NO or NC, as required by application
or as noted; or SPDT (NO and NC).
Accessories: As noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Siemens Water Technologies; Model 9G-EF Direct Acting Float
Switch (B100).
b.
Contegra; Model FS90.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 17
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type:
1)
Suitable for non-hazardous locations.
2)
Only 2 wires and a ground are required.
Service (Liquid): Wastewater, unless otherwise noted.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint: As noted.
b.
Differential: 1 inches maximum.
c.
Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 160 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Entire Assembly: NEMA 4X
b.
Mounting: 4 inch ANSI B16.5 Flange
Signal Interface:
a.
Switch Contacts:
1)
Isolated, rated at least 1 amp continuous at 220V ac.
2)
Contact Type: Normally Closed
Accessories: As noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Endress+ Hauser; FEL51
b.
Or equal.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type: Suitable for Class I, Division I, Group D hazardous
locations.
Service (Liquid): Primary Sludge, Thickened Sludge
Performance:
a.
Setpoint: As noted.
b.
Differential: -/+ .5 inches maximum.
c.
Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 160 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Entire Assembly: NEMA 4X
b.
Mounting: 4 inch ANSI B16.5 Flange
c.
Probe length: Supply as needed to meet setpoint requirement.
Signal Interface:
a.
Connects to 4-20mA analog input module:
1)
Provides 16mA when probe is in air.
2)
Provides 8mA when probe is submerged
Accessories: As noted.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 18
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
J.
General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type: Direct acting; rises on stem.
Service: Liquid, water, wastewater, unless otherwise noted.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint as noted.
b.
Switch Actuation Point: Approximately one-half distance from
end of stem to mounting.
c.
Operating Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 300 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Assembly Material: Stainless steel.
b.
Float Size: 2-1/8-inch diameter.
Mounting: Stem Mount: 1/4-inch NPT.
Signal Interface:
a.
Switch Type: Magnetic reed switch.
b.
Switch Contacts:
1)
Isolated, rated at 100 VA.
2)
NO or NC (by inverting float on unit stem).
3)
Lead Wires: 18 AWG, 24-inch length.
Manufacturer and Product: GEMS; Single Station Liquid Level
Switch, Model LS-1950.
P4 Pressure Gauge:
1.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Function: Local pressure indication.
b.
Type: Bourdon tube element.
Performance:
a.
Scale Range: As noted.
b.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.50 percent of full scale.
Features:
a.
Dial: 4-1/2-inch diameter.
b.
Pointer Vibration Reduction: Required, unless otherwise noted.
Use the following method:
1)
Liquid filled gauge front, unless otherwise noted.
a)
Glycerine fill, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 19
d.
4.
5.
6.
K.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Function: Isolate sensing element from process fluid.
b.
Type:
1)
Diaphragm.
2)
Fluid filled between diaphragm and sensing element.
Service:
a.
Pressure: Same as associated sensor.
b.
Temperature Range: If noted.
Performance:
a.
Pressure:
1)
For threaded process connections, at least 2,500 psig at
100 degrees F.
2)
Glycerin Fill: Suitable only for pressure (not vacuum
applications).
b.
Temperature:
1)
Dependent upon fill fluid.
a)
Glycerin (food grade): Zero to 400 degrees F.
b)
Silicone: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 600 degrees F.
c)
Silicone (food grade): Zero to 375 degrees F.
d)
Halocarbon: Minus 70 degrees F to 300 degrees F.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 20
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
L.
Features:
a.
Materials:
1)
Lower Housing: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise
noted.
2)
Diaphragm Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise noted.
3)
Top Housing: Steel, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Diaphragm: Welded to upper housing, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Filling screw in upper housing.
d.
Fill Fluid:
1)
As noted.
2)
Or approved equal.
3)
Factory assembled and filled.
e.
Flushing Connection: 1/4-inch NPT in lower housing.
f.
Diaphragm Seal Displacement: 0.1 cubic inch, nominal.
Connections:
a.
Instrument: 1/2-inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or
shown.
b.
Process: 1/2-inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or shown.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ashcroft; Type 201.
b.
Ametek; Mansfield and Green Division; Type SG.
c.
WIKA; Type L990.10.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Function: Monitor pressure.
b.
Type: Diaphragm actuated switch.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint:
1)
As noted.
2)
Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b.
Range: Noted setpoint shall fall between 20 percent and
80 percent of range.
c.
Overpressure Proof Pressure: At least 400 percent of rated
maximum static pressure.
d.
Operating Temperature Range:
1)
Dependent on actuator seal materials.
2)
For Buna-N seal, 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Actuator Seal: Buna-N, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Differential (deadband): Fixed.
c.
Reset: Automatic, unless otherwise noted.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 21
4.
5.
6.
7.
M.
d.
Mounting: Surface, unless otherwise noted.
Process Connection:
a.
1/2-inch NPT female connections, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Materials: Nickel-plated brass, unless otherwise noted.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
Signal Interface:
a.
Contact Type:
1)
DPDT, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Rated for 10 amps minimum at 120V ac.
b.
Hermetically Sealed Switch: If noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Ashcroft; Type 400, B Series.
b.
United Electric; 400 Series.
P9 Pressure Transmitter:
1.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Function: Measure pressure and transmit signal proportional to
pressure.
b.
Type:
1)
Electronic variable capacitance or silicon strain gauge.
2)
Two-wire transmitter; smart electronics.
c.
Parts: Transmitter and accessories.
Performance:
a.
Range: As noted.
1)
Select transmitters factory upper range limit (URL) such
that upper boundary of noted range is as close as possible to
80 percent of factory URL, but does not exceed it.
b.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of span, unless otherwise
noted.
c.
Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus
175 degrees F, with integral meter.
d.
Process Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus
250 degrees F.
e.
Humidity: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.
f.
Hazardous Location Certifications: If and as noted.
Features:
a.
Type: Gauge pressure, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Adjustable damping.
c.
LCD indicator, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Display in either percent or engineering units, field
configurable.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 22
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
N.
General:
a.
Function:
1)
Sense pressure in a process line and transfer to pressure
monitoring device.
2)
Protect attached pressure monitoring device from sludge or
slurry.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 23
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 24
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
O.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General:
a.
Function: Used for process monitoring and control by emulating
functions of conventional panel mounted equipment such as
relays, timers, counters, current switches, calculation modules,
PID controllers, stepping switches, and drum programmers.
b.
Type: Microprocessor based device programmable using ladder
logic.
c.
Parts: Central processing unit (CPU), power supply, local and
remote input/output modules, local and remote base (chassis/rack)
controllers, I/O bases (chassis/rack), data highway, and factory
assembled interconnecting cables. Provide components required to
make a complete and totally operational system. Reference PLC
system block diagram in Drawings.
Environmental:
a.
Temperature: Operating range 32 to 140 degrees F (0 to
60 degrees C); storage range minus 40 to 158 degrees F (0 to
70 degrees C).
b.
Humidity: Operating range 5 to 95 percent noncondensing.
c.
Vibration:
1)
Sinusoidal: IEC 68-2-6, Test Fc; 0.15 mm peak-to-peak,
10-to 57-Hz; 1 g, 57- to 150-Hz.
2)
Random: IEC 68-2-34, Test Fdc; 0.4 g2/Hz, 80- to 350-Hz,
and 3dB/octave rolloff, 80- to 20-Hz and 350- to 2-KHz at
10 min/axis.
d.
Noise: IEC 801, Part 3, Level 3 and Part 4, Level 3;
MIL STD-461B.
e.
Isolation: User-side to PLC side 1,500V rms.
Random Access Memory (RAM):
a.
Type: CMOS type.
b.
Word Size: 16 bits, minimum.
c.
Battery Backup: 6 months, minimum.
d.
Memory Size: Sufficient to implement all applications software
plus 100 percent spare.
e.
Read only memory (ROM) for controllers operating system and
diagnostics.
f.
Memory Protection: Keylock switch.
CPU: See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Power Supply: One unit for each input/output base assembly:
a.
Voltage: 120/220 volts (user selectable), 60-Hz input; 85 to
132 volts output.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 25
6.
7.
b.
Mounting: Integral with base.
Input/Output: Complete input/output system, including remote I/O
points.
a.
Discrete Input Modules:
1)
Voltage: 120 volts, 60-Hz.
2)
Operating Power: 2 watts.
3)
Points per Module: 16, maximum.
4)
LED status indicator for each point.
5)
Isolation: Between input point and PLC, 1,500 volts rms.
6)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
b.
Discrete Output Modules:
1)
Voltage: 120 volts, 60-Hz.
2)
Operating Power: 2 watts.
3)
Load Rating: 2 amps continuous.
4)
Isolation: Between PLC and output point, 1,500 volts rms.
5)
Points per Module: 16 maximum.
6)
LED status indicator for each point.
7)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
c.
Isolated Discrete Output Modules:
1)
Type: Isolated Form C relay.
2)
Voltage: 120 volts, 60-Hz.
3)
Load Rating: 2 amps continuous.
4)
Operating Power: 2.5 watts.
5)
Points Per Module: 16, maximum.
6)
LED status indicator and fuse for each point.
7)
Isolation: Between PLC and output point, 1,500 volts rms.
8)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
d.
Analog Input/Output Modules:
1)
Voltage: 24 volts dc.
2)
Power: 3 watts.
3)
Isolated Analog Output Points Per Module: 8 maximum.
4)
Isolation: Between PLC and I/O point and between I/O
points, 1,500 volts rms.
5)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Remote Input/Output Bases: See PLC Equipment List supplement in
Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 26
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
9.
10.
11.
P.
Q.
Redundancy Requirement:
a.
I/O:
1)
All discrete inputs in one group, discrete outputs in another
group.
2)
Wired to/from PLC I/O modules or racks to/from control
panel terminal blocks in all panels (direct connection of
field wiring to I/O module or rack is not acceptable.
Identification:
a.
Nameplates installed above/below each PLC component (CPU,
I/O rack, power supply.).
b.
Label configured I/O points as they have been configured
(addressed) in the system, as approved by the Engineer.
Spares: See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Manufacturers and Products: Allen-Bradley; Model ControlLogix only.
General:
a.
Function: Provide Operator Control for equipment.
b.
Allowance: Because technology like this changes so rapidly
provide a $6,000 equipment allowance for each device. This
allowance does not include installation and other costs. Please
include additional costs in bid.
c.
Product manufacturer and model number will be provided to
contractor for purchasing during construction.
d.
Location: Shall be installed in doors of local control panels as
specified in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for
Process Systems, Supplement Control Panel Schedule.
UPS:
1.
2.
General:
a.
Function: provides uninterrupted power for local control panels
Features:
a.
1 grometted cable connection for 3C 10 AWG SO cord for input
power. Cord shall be 6 feet long with NEMA 5-20P.
b.
1 grometted cable connection for 3C 10 AWG SO cord for output
power. Cord shall be 6 feet long with NEMA 5-20R.
c.
Rating: 1800 VA.
d.
Input: 120 Vac.
e.
Output: 120 Vac.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 27
3.
R.
2.
3.
PART 3
General:
a.
Function: Allows power for local control panel to bypass UPS
when providing periodic maintenance.
Features:
a.
3 position Bypass-UPS-OFF switch for bypassing UPS.
b.
2 position ON-OFF for turning AC power off to UPS.
c.
Provide 3 conductor #10 AWG SO cord from bypass switch to
UPS as required for UPS input power and UPS output power.
Manufacturers and Products: Powerware.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 28
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 40 99 90
PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
Test panels and panel assemblies for proper operation prior to shipment from
equipment manufacturers factory.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
1.
PART 2
2.01
1.05
PRODUCTS
SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Analog Signals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
C.
Discrete Signals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
2.02
CORROSION PROTECTION
A.
2.03
CONTROL PANEL
A.
B.
C.
D.
NEMA 250, Type 4X Panels: Type 316 stainless steel construction unless
otherwise specified.
E.
Doors:
1.
2.
F.
Cutouts shall be cut, punched, or drilled and finished smoothly with rounded
edges.
G.
Access: Front, suitable for installation with back and sides adjacent to or in
contact with other surfaces, unless otherwise specified.
H.
Temperature Control:
1.
2.
3.
I.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
J.
K.
Minimum of one 120-volt GFCI duplex receptacle for panels 12 cubic feet
and larger.
L.
Finish:
1.
2.
M.
Panel Manufacturers:
1.
2.
N.
Hoffman.
H.F. Cox.
Breather and Drains: Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 4 and 4X panels.
1.
2.04
B.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
Wiring:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Wiring Interface:
1.
2.
3.
G.
ac Circuits:
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: For current to be carried, but not less than 14 AWG.
Analog Signal Circuits:
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type 3 stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs.
b.
Size: 18 AWG, minimum.
Other dc Circuits.
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: 18 AWG, minimum.
Separate analog and other dc circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power
and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at
device terminations.
Enclose wiring in sheet metal raceways or plastic wiring ducts.
Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination.
a.
Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
Brady PermaSleeve.
2)
Tyco Electronics.
Terminal Blocks:
1.
2.
Quantity:
a.
For external connections.
b.
Wire spare or unused panel mounted elements to their panels
terminal blocks.
c.
Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less
than 10.
General: Group to keep 120V ac circuits separate from 24V dc circuits.
a.
Connection Type: Screw connection clamp.
b.
Compression Clamp:
1)
Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves penetrating
wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection.
2)
Guides strands of wire into terminal.
c.
Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking.
d.
Current Bar: Copper or treated brass.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insulation:
1)
Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 to plus 110 degrees C.
2)
Two funnel shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry.
f.
Mounting:
1)
Rail.
2)
Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without
displacing adjacent blocks.
3)
End Stops: One at each end of rail, minimum.
g.
Wire Preparation: Stripping only.
h.
Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on
terminal or rail.
i.
Marking System:
1)
Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block.
2)
Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags.
3)
Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops.
4)
Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown.
Terminal Block, 120-Volt Power:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 30 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 through 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
g.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.
Terminal Block, Ground:
a.
Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG.
b.
Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG.
c.
Color: Green and yellow body.
d.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
e.
Grounding: Ground terminal blocks electrically grounded to the
mounting rail.
f.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P.
Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch:
a.
Use: Provide one for each discrete input and output field interface
wire.
b.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
c.
Rated Current: 10 amp.
d.
Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG.
e.
Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG.
f.
Color: Gray body, orange switch.
g.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
h.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SN.
Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V dc.
b.
Rated Current: 6.3 amp.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
7.
H.
I.
Relays:
1.
2.
General:
a.
Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket.
b.
Relay Enclosure: Provide dust cover.
c.
Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring.
d.
Socket Mounting: Rail.
e.
Furnish holddown clips.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:
a.
Type: Compact general purpose plug-in.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 240V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac).
g.
Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations.
h.
Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations.
i.
Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
J.
2.
K.
j.
Push-to-test button.
k.
Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching:
a.
Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac).
g.
Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations.
h.
Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations.
i.
Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay:
a.
Type: Adjustable time delay relay.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 240V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As specified or shown.
f.
Operating Temperature: Minus 10 to 55 degrees C.
g.
Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent.
h.
Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall
between 20 to 80 percent or range.
i.
Time Delay Setpoint: As specified or shown.
j.
Mode of Operation: As specified or shown.
k.
Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to
dust cover.
l.
Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield.
1)
Series CB for 0.1-second to 100-minute delay time ranges.
2)
Series CK for 0.1- to 120-second delay time ranges.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
L.
2.
3.
Potentiometer Units:
a.
Three-terminal, oiltight construction, resolution of 1 percent and
linearity of plus or minus 5 percent.
b.
Single-hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses
between 1/8 and 1/4 inch.
c.
Include legend plates with service markings.
d.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Allen-Bradley; Model 800T.
2)
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Model 10250T.
Indicating Lights:
a.
Heavy-duty, push-to-test type, oiltight, industrial LED type for
120V ac applications.
b.
Screwed on prismatic glass lenses in colors noted and factory
engraved legend plates for service legend.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T.
2)
General Electric; CR2940U.
Pushbutton, Momentary:
a.
Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial type with full guard and
momentary contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at 120V ac.
b.
Standard size legend plates with black field and white markings
for service legend.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
4.
M.
2.
3.
Potentiometer, Watertight:
a.
Three-terminal, heavy-duty NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight
construction, resolution of 1 percent and linearity of plus or minus
5 percent.
b.
Single-hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses
between 1/8 and 1/4 inch.
c.
Include engraved legend plates with service markings.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 800H.
Indicating Lights, Watertight:
a.
Heavy-duty, push-to-test type, NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight,
industrial LED type for 120V ac applications and corrosionresistant service.
b.
Screwed on prismatic lenses and factory engraved legend plates
for service legend.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Square D; Type SK.
2)
Allen-Bradley; Type 800H.
Pushbutton, Momentary, Watertight:
a.
Heavy-duty, NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight, industrial type with
momentary contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes
continuous and corrosion-resistant service.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
4.
2.05
2.06
Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings for
service legend.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Square D; Type SK.
2)
Allen-Bradley; Type 800H.
Selector Switch, Watertight:
a.
Heavy-duty, NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight, industrial type with
contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes continuous and
corrosion-resistant service.
b.
Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings, for
service legend.
c.
Operators: Black knob type.
d.
Single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from
1/16 to 1/4 inch.
e.
Manufacturer and Products:
1)
Square D; Class 9001, Type SK.
2)
Allen-Bradley; Type 800H.
B.
2.
3.
4.
C.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.
2.
Tag
Inscription(s)
Color
ON
ON
Red
OFF
OFF
Green
OPEN
OPEN
Red
CLOSED
CLOSED
Green
LOW
LOW
Amber
FAIL
FAIL
Amber
HIGH
HIGH
Amber
AUTO
AUTO
White
MANUAL
MANUAL
Yellow
LOCAL
LOCAL
White
REMOTE
REMOTE
Yellow
FORWARD
FORWARD
Red
REVERSE
REVERSE
Blue
Lettering: Black on white and amber lenses; white on red and green
lenses.
Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions:
a.
Use following unless otherwise noted.
Tag Function
Inscription(s)
Color
OO
ON
OFF
Black
Black
OC
OPEN
CLOSE
Black
Black
OCA
OPEN
CLOSE
AUTO
Black
Black
Black
OOA
ON
OFF
AUTO
Black
Black
Black
MA
MANUAL
AUTO
Black
Black
SS
START
STOP
Black
Black
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
2.07
Tag Function
Inscription(s)
Color
RESET
RESET
Black
EMERGENCY
STOP
EMERGENCY
STOP
Red
Lettering Color:
1)
Black on white and yellow buttons.
2)
White on black, red, and green buttons.
B.
Suppressor Locations:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Suppressor Design:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Construction: First-stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and secondstage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance;
includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal.
Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum.
Recovery: Automatic.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C.
Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
2.
F.
G.
2.
3.01
Grounding:
1.
PART 3
EXECUTION
ELECTRICAL POWER AND SIGNAL WIRING
A.
Restrain control and signal wiring in control panels by plastic ties or ducts.
Secure hinge wiring at each end so bending or twisting will occur around the
longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with a sleeve.
B.
Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Install
abrasion protection for wire bundles passing through holes or across edges of
sheet metal.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
PROTECTION
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 41 22 13.19
MONORAIL HOIST AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Stress and Safety Factors: ANSI MH27.1 and ANSI B30.11. Properly select
materials of construction for stresses to which subjected.
C.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Information Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Temperature:
1.
2.
B.
Humidity: 50 percent.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MONORAILHOIST AND
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 1
C.
Location:
1.
2.
1.04
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
PART 2
2.01
GANTRY CRANE
A.
General: Provide a fixed height mobile aluminum gantry crane suitable for a
minimum one ton load. Gantry crane shall be provided with a top support
trolley. Crane manufacturer to coordinate equipment requirements with other
utilities and obstructions. Crane and complete crane assembly shall be
warranted by the manufacture for 5 years.
B.
Frame:
1.
2.
Frame shall be suitable for a one (1) ton/2000 lbs load. The inside clear
dimension of the crane shall be 10 feet wide by 10 feet tall.
Frame to be constructed of all aluminum with all bolted or welded
structural aluminum frame. Frame shall be either structural aluminum
tube or I-beam.
C.
Casters: Casters shall be suitable for easily rolling and turning on a concrete
floor. Each wheel shall be provided with a wheel brake to prevent unexpected
movement. Wheels shall be steel with mold on polyurethane protectors.
D.
E.
Manual chain fall hoist rated for (1) ton/2000 lbs load.
Lift shall be 10 feet.
Hoist shall incorporate a mechanical brake to hold load in place.
Chain shall be heat treated and rated for lifted load.
Provide lift hook to attach to trolley with retaining clip to hold hoist
securely to trolley.
Provide an oversized lift hook with a retaining clip.
Trolley:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.02
MONORAIL CRANE
A.
General:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MONORAILHOIST AND
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 3
B.
Trolley:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Hoist:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Electrical:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MONORAILHOIST AND
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 5
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
B.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 43 22 56
VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)
WAS Phosphate Release Basin Mixers: WSR-MIX-P-64021, WSR-MIX-P-64022,
WSR-MIX-P-64023, WSR-MIX-P-64024.
Aeration Basins Anaerobic Mixers: AER-MIX-P- 30815A, AER-MIX-P-30815B, AERMIX-P-30816A, and AER-MIX-P-30816B
(Total Quantity: 8)
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.
The Work of this section includes providing the vertical mixers and all
appurtenant Work.
B.
Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the WAS phosphate release basin
mixers and the aeration basins anaerobic mixers, complete with all accessories
and appurtenances (including, but not necessarily limited to, electric motors,
and components), be the end product of one responsible system manufacturer
or responsible system supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor
shall obtain each system from the responsible supplier of the equipment,
which supplier shall furnish all components and accessories of the system to
enhance compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to
place the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified
performance, features and functions without altering or modifying the
Contractors responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible to the Owner for providing the equipment systems as specified
herein.
C.
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
1.03
a.
B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
b.
B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
c.
B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National
Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
9.
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Spare Parts:
1.
2.
3.
1.05
WARRANTY
A.
PART 2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
2.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Wetted parts are defined as
any parts extending below the mixer support bridge.
B.
C.
Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection and design of
components where so indicated in individual sections. When not indicated
there, minimum service factors shall be 1.25, except for gears and gear drives
as specified herein.
D.
Safety Devices: The completed work shall include all necessary permanent
safety devices, such as machinery guards, emergency stops and similar items
required by OSHA, and other federal, state, and local health and safety
regulations.
E.
F.
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Except as otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiralbevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA
Standards, with a minimum service factor of 3, a minimum L-10 bearing
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.03
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
2.04
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
2.05
Mixer shall be designed for the service conditions specified on the Mixer Data
Sheets.
Shafts:
1.
The shaft shall be connected from the reducer drive by a rigid flanged
coupling with a machined registered fit. The coupling and impeller
hub(s) shall be designed to transmit 150 percent of the torque and
150 percent of the axial loads. The coupling shall be welded to the shaft,
turned to a large smooth radius and faced with a registered fit so any
shaft, turbine, drive of the same size can be interchanged. Match marks
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
B.
Impellers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.06
Impellers shall have one axial flow impeller. The impellers shall be
sized and designed for operation at a maximum speed of 25 rpm and
shall not require dynamic balancing. In addition, the impellers shall be
designed as necessary to suspend solids to a uniform concentration
without stratification at all conditions listed on the Mixer Data Sheets.
Mixing impellers shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel and
have a minimum diameter of 80 inches. Unless otherwise specified, the
impellers shall be of bolted construction, and shall be connected to the
agitator shaft with a hook key for maximum security. A keyway shall be
provided to allow for vertical adjustment of impeller.
The maximum stress in any impeller component shall not exceed
11,000 psi under maximum operating loads.
The shaft-impeller system design shall be such that its operating speed
shall not exceed 40 percent of its first lateral critical speed. The use of
stabilizing rings or fins will not influence this limitation. The shaft shall
be safe for operation when the liquid level passes through the impeller
while the mixer is running.
2.07
shall not be used or required and shimming and/or fitting will not be
allowed. Shaft shall rotate with a maximum run out of 1/8 inch per
10 feet of length.
All exposed rotating mixer shafts and rotating components shall be
provided with a totally enclosed expanded stainless steel safety guard in
conformance with OSHA requirements. Banded access openings with
screwed covers shall be provided where required for access to
lubrication fittings.
The shaft shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inches in diameter and designed
such that the maximum stress shall not exceed 8,000 psi under
maximum operating loads. It shall be of overhung design. The use of
submerged bearings is not permitted.
Motors: Provide as indicated on mixer data sheets at the end of this section.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Stainless steel anchor bolts and nuts. Number and size as recommended by
manufacturer.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
2.08
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.09
PART 3
3.02
3.03
Prepare surface and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating, System No. 4.
3.01
Factory and shop inspections and tests. One mixer shall be functionally wet
tested for a period of 4 hours at the factory for vibration and maximum shaft
runout. Provide Engineer with certified test results.
EXECUTION
B.
For shipment, exposed surfaces subject to rust, such as mounting flange faces,
etc., shall be covered with a rust-preventive compound such as Kendall No. 5,
or equal.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Lubricants: The installation includes oil and grease for initial operation.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
2.
3.
B.
Training Services:
1.
2.
3.05
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.06
Solvent clean (SP 1-82) and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating, System No. 4. Finish coat color shall be coordinated
with Owner.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
2.
Aeration Basins No. 5 and No. 6 Anaerobic Zone 2 Mixer Data Sheet.
WAS Phosphate Release Tank Mixers Data Sheet.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MIXER DATA
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
EQUIPMENT NAME
Anoxic Zone 2 Mixer Basin 5 and
Anoxic Zone 2 Mixer Basin 6
4 Total
SPEED TYPE
Constant Speed
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
MODEL
Enviropax, Inc.
Or equal
Anco
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Mixed:
Suspended Solids:
Temperature
Mixed Volume:
Bottom Tank Elevation:
Maximum Liquid Level:
Specific Gravity:
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Maximum Speed
25
rpm
Minimum Pumping Capacity
25,000
gpm
Maximum Shaft Runout:
1/8" per 10 ft.
One (2) mixer per Mixed Volume
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mixer Type:
Vertical
Number of Impellers:
1
Minimum Impeller Diameter
80 inches
Impeller Location:
12" Vertical adjustment
Impeller Const:
Bolted and Keyed
Casing:
Manufacturers Standard
Shaft:
Type 316 SST
Impellers:
Type 316 SST
Lubrication:
Oil
Drive Type:
Gear
Mounting Type:
Pedestal/Baseplate
MOTOR DATA
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
2 HP
Voltage:
460
Phase:
3
Enclosure Type:
TEFC
Synchronous Speed:
NA
rpm
Mounting Type:
Horizontal
X Vertical
Winding:
One
Two
Multispeed, Two-speed:
rpm
High
(<30%)
Extra High
(<175%)
Special Features:
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MIXER DATA
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
EQUIPMENT NAME
WAS Phosphate Release Basin Mixers
SPEED TYPE
4 Total
Constant Speed
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
MODEL
Enviropax, Inc.
Or equal
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Mixed:
Suspended Solids:
Temperature
Mixed Volume:
Bottom Tank Elevation:
Maximum Liquid Level:
Specific Gravity:
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Maximum Speed
25
rpm
Minimum Pumping Capacity
30,000
gpm
Maximum Shaft Runout:
1/8" per 10 ft.
Other Requirements:
Two (2) mixer per Mixed Volume
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mixer Type:
Vertical
Number of Impellers:
1
Minimum Impeller Diameter
90 inches
Upper Position:
N/A
Impeller Location:
12" Vertical adjustment
Impeller Const:
Bolted and Keyed
Casing:
Shaft:
Impellers:
Lubrication:
Drive Type:
Mounting Type:
Manufacturers
Type 316 SST
Type 316 SST
Oil
Gear
Pedestal/Baseplate
MOTOR DATA
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
2 HP
Phase:
3
Voltage:
460
Mounting
Enclosure
Type:Type:
TEFC
Synchronous Speed:
NA
rpm
Horizontal
X Vertical
Winding:
X One
Two
Multispeed, Two-speed:
rpm
Shaft
Split
Hollow
Upthrust:
High
(<30%)
Extra High
(<175%)
Special Features:
PW\WBG\426399
4/3/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 43 22 57
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)
Aeration Basin 5 Swing Zone Mixers: AER-MIX-P- 30855A, AER-MIX-P-30855B
Aeration Basin 6 Swing Zone Mixers: AER-MIX-P-30856A, AER-MIX-P-30856B
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.
The Work of this section includes providing the submersible mixers and all
appurtenant work.
B.
Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the aeration basin submersible
mixers, complete with all accessories and appurtenances (including, but not
necessarily limited to, electric motors, mast assemblies, and components), be
the end product of one responsible system manufacturer or responsible system
supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain each system
from the responsible supplier of the equipment, which supplier shall furnish
all components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease
of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in
operation in conformance with the specified performance, features and
functions without altering or modifying the Contractors responsibilities under
the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for
providing the equipment systems as specified herein.
C.
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 1
9.
10.
11.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel with the exception of the
motor housing and gear box. Wetted parts are defined as any parts extending
below the freeboard of the aeration basin.
B.
Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection and design of
components where so indicated in individual sections. When not indicated
there, minimum service factors shall be 1.25, except for gears and gear drives
as specified herein.
C.
Safety Devices: The completed Work shall include all necessary permanent
safety devices, such as machinery guards, emergency stops and similar items
required by OSHA, and other federal, state, and local health and safety
regulations.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 3
E.
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Except as otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiralbevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA
Standards, with a minimum service factor of 2, a minimum L-10 bearing
life of 100,000 hours based on full motor nameplate horsepower and a
minimum efficiency of 94 percent.
Allowable Types:
a.
Gear reduction units are required for the mixers. Gear speed
reducers or increasers shall be of the single or double reduction
inline type, oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed, or similar.
The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy-duty steel construction
with lifting lugs. An oil drain and inspection plug shall be
provided and installed for easy access.
b.
Gearbox may be one-stage planetary reduction gear, with a
service factor of 2.0. The motor shaft shall be provided with a
spline to attach to the gear reducer. The reduction stage shall
consist of an integral toothed ring gear to which three planet
wheels are mounted on the planet carriers, engaging with the
pinion.
Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped
fully assembled for field installation.
Material selections shall comply with AGMA values and the
manufacturers recommendations.
The area where the propeller shaft enters the pumped media shall be
sealed by two totally independent mechanical shaft seals, each with its
own independent single spring system. The outer mechanical seal shall
be protected from solids in the pumped media by a labyrinth cast into
the propeller hub/seal housing interface. An oil-filled chamber with
drain and inspection plug (each with positive anti-leak seal) shall
separate the seals and provide lubrication. Single mechanical seals or
rotary lip seals shall not be considered adequate for this critical sealing
area.
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
2.03
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
A.
2.04
Design the submersible mixers for continuous full load duty and guarantee the
mixers based on the design conditions specified on the data sheet. Design and
construct all units to permit economical maintenance. Select all units to allow
as much interchangeability of parts as possible. Unspecified details of design
and construction of the mixing unit will be manufacturers standard.
Mast Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 5
2.05
Provide one portable lifting davit suitable for use with all mixers in this
section. The davit shall be designed to be mounted in a floor socket next to the
mixer mast. Design and provide one floor socket for each mixer location, four
total. The lifting davit shall include a manual brake winch, and shall be
adequately rated to lift the mixer and support arm off the mast and directly
onto the adjacent deck surface. A removable section of handrail shall be
provided by Contractor, such that the mixer does not need to be lifted over the
handrail. A lifting cable, permanently attached to each mixer, shall be
provided in sufficient length for attachment of the upper end to the winch
cable reel when the davit assembly is installed. Provide storage area for cable
when davit is not installed.
B.
Materials:
1.
2.
2.06
Motors: Provide as indicated on mixer data sheets at the end of this section.
ACCESSORIES
2.07
B.
C.
D.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.08
Prepare surface and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating, System No. 2.
The final acceptance of the equipment requires a field test for handling the
specified fluid under specified conditions.
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Furnish for each unit, certified factory flow test based on measured axial flow
thrust, as per proposed Hydraulic Institute Standards.
C.
Make available to the Owner without charge, all test records, whether test
witnessing is required or not on the Data Sheet.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide stainless steel mounting bolts, washers, and nuts and install the
equipment at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
C.
Lubricants: The installation includes oil and grease for initial operation.
3.03
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
2.
3.
B.
Training Services:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 7
3.04
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.05
Solvent clean (SP 1-82) and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating, System No. 2.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
MIXER DATA
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
EQUIPMENT NAME
SPEED TYPE
Aeration Basin 5, 6
Swing Zone Mixers
Constant Speed
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
MODEL
KSB, Inc.
Landia
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Mixed:
Suspended Solids:
Temperature
Mixed Volume:
Bottom Tank Elevation:
Maximum Liquid Level:
Specific Gravity:
Viscosity:
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Maximum Speed
Minimum Pumping Capacity
390
15,250
rpm
gpm
Other Requirements:
Two (2) mixers per Mixed Volume
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mixer Type:
Number of Propellers:
Minimum Propeller Diameter
Impeller Locations:
Upper Position:
Lower Position:
Impeller Const:
Mfr. Std.
Submersible
1
20 inches
N/A
See Drawings
Casing:
Manufacturers Standard
Shaft:
Type 316 SST
Propellers:
Type 316 SST
Lubrication:
Oil
Drive Type:
Gear Reduction
Mounting Type:
Submersible
MOTOR DATA
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
9 HP
Voltage:
460
Phase:
3
Enclosure Type:
Submersible
Synchronous Speed:
NA
rpm
Mounting Type:
Horizontal
Vertical
Winding:
X One
Two
Multispeed, Two-speed:
rpm
High
Special Features:
(<30%)
Extra High
(<175%)
Manufacturer to provide the motor seal failure moisture detection and motor high temp sensors.
PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 24.01
PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
for use in the gravity separation of solids contained in raw wastewater which
has been screened but not degritted.
B.
Type: Equipment furnished under this section shall be suitable for installation
in the existing circular primary clarifier tanks. The equipment shall have an
energy dissipating influent well supported from a center influent column along
with a flocculation well. The equipment shall also have sludge rake arms.
Sludge collector blades shall be attached to the rake arms and arranged to
move the settled solids on the tank bottom to a sludge hopper located on the
tank bottom adjacent to the center column. The equipment shall be
specifically designed for the conditions specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings.
C.
Definitions:
1.
D.
Equipment List:
1.
Equipment No.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
E.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
dead load shall not exceed 1/360 of the span. The influent well and its
supports shall be designed for stable, safe, distortion-free operation
when full of water and the tank empty, and vice versa.
Other specific design requirements are as follows:
Proposed
Internal tank diameter, feet
90
13.8
17.5
Slope, inches/feet
36
Influent well:
Diameter, feet
Depth, feet
Flocculation well:
Diameter, feet
24
F.
30,000
42
1/2
Operating Conditions:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards:
1.
2.
1.04
Structural Steel and Welds: All structural steel used for equipment
fabrication shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for Steel for Bridges and Buildings and ASTM A36. All
welding shall conform to the latest standards of the American Welding
Society (AWS). Continuous seal welds shall be provided at all welded
joints. Skip welds will not be permitted.
Structural Design: All steel structural components shall be so designed
that the stresses developed under the specified conditions will not
exceed the allowable stresses defined by the AISC standards and the
aforementioned standards. Except where specifically indicated
otherwise, all plate and structural members designed for submerged
service shall be steel with a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. AISC
recommended limits for slenderness shall not be exceeded on any
structural steel member.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
1 Set: All bearings and bearing seal rings for drive unit, except the main
turntable bearing.
1 Set: All gaskets for drive unit.
1 Set: Spur gear seal, if used.
2 Sets: Stainless steel squeegees.
1 Set: Shear pins, if used.
1 Set: Any special tools required to assemble, disassemble, or maintain
the equipment.
4 Sets: Retaining springs for sludge collector boxes.
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A.
2.02
MATERIALS
Component
Material
Center Column
ASTM A36
Steel Plate
ASTM A36
ASTM A36
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Component
2.03
Material
Squeegees
Stainless steel
Drive Cage
Worm Gear
Pinion
Main Bearings
Aluminum
EQUIPMENT
A.
Influent Structure:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
B.
Drive Cage: Torque shall be transmitted from the drive unit to the sludge
collection arms and scum skimmers by a drive cage. The drive cage shall
encompass the center column and shall be of sufficient strength to transmit
and/or carry all loads and stresses associated with 200 percent of the
continuous operating torque. Drive cages shall be capable of withstanding
forces from operation in the directions. Detailed calculations shall be provided
showing the related stresses developed in the drive cage at that torque.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
D.
Truss Arms: The clarifier sludge collector mechanism shall have two
structural steel rake collector arms rigidly connected to the center drive
cage. The rake collector arms shall be of a truss construction
conforming to the slope of the tank floor.
a.
Each rake collector arm shall be provided with steel blades to
scrape the settled solids along the tank bottom to the sludge
hopper located adjacent to the center column.
b.
To ensure alignment and connection to the center drive cage, the
width of the rake collector arms shall be the same as the center
drive cage. The design of the arms shall not incorporate the use of
any tie rods.
c.
The blade setting shall be identical for each rake collector arm
with the blades spaced so that the entire circular portion of the
tank bottom will be scraped at least twice with each revolution of
the mechanism. The main rake collector blades shall have a
minimum depth of 12 inches including squeegees. All blades shall
be provided with adjustable spring Type 316 or Type 316L
stainless steel squeegees projecting approximately 1-1/2 inches
below the bottom of the blade and secured by Type 316L stainless
steel nuts, bolts, and accessories. Each Type 316L stainless steel
squeegee shall have a minimum thickness of 26 gauge and be
designed for a 2-inch minimum adjustment in the vertical plane.
Drive MechanismOption A:
1.
Design Parameters: The drive unit shall be designed for the torque
values previously listed. It shall turn the mechanism at the design
collector tip speed. The drive main bearing shall be designed for the
total rotating mechanism loads with a minimum L-10 life of 100 years
or 876,000 hours. The drive unit shall be capable of producing and
withstanding the previously listed momentary peak torque while
starting. The drive main gear shall be designed to a minimum AGMA 6
rating when rated in accordance with the latest AGMA standard. Gear
teeth shall be designed for proper load distribution and sharing. Stub
tooth design and surface hardening of the main gear shall not be
allowed. The main bearing shall be capable of withstanding the listed
overturning moment without the aid of any underwater guides or
bearings to ensure correct tooth contact for AGMA rating of the main
gear.
a.
All spur gearing shall be designed to the latest AGMA spur gear
standard for strength and surface durability, based on a life of
175,000 hours. The design running torque rating of the drive
gearing shall be based on the smaller of the strength and durability
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
6.
E.
Drive MechanismOption B:
1.
2.
3.
General: The drive assembly shall include an electric gear motor, worm
gear and worm gear reducer, pinion gear, turntable type main spur gear,
drive base, shear pin hub coupling, steel roller drive chain, and torque
overload protection system. The spur gear set shall be designed in
accordance with AGMA 2001-D. The worm gears shall be designed in
accordance with AGMA 6034-A for a service factor of 1.25 applied to
the continuous operating torque. A reversible, failsafe,
electromechanical torque protection device may be acceptable in lieu of
shear pins provided the Contractor makes all changes necessary to the
appurtenant systems.
a.
The drive mechanism shall be mounted on the influent column
with the top of the spur gear housing capable of supporting the
total access bridge load by means of equally loaded, removable
bridge supports. Drive mechanism components shall be designed
for the rated torque specified in Article1.01 E. Calculations shall
be provided that substantiate the torque rating (including
momentary peak torque) of the gear assembly. Numerical values
shall be shown for all terms used in the AGMA rating equations.
Gear Motor: The drive motor shall be 1,800 rpm. The motor shall be
designed for continuous duty, Class II applications in accordance with
AGMA 6019-E. Motor bearings shall be rated for a minimum L-10 life
of 100,000 hours.
a.
Power transmission between the gear motor and a special, singlereduction worm gear reducer shall be made through a roller chain
and sprocket drive assembly. The chain drive shall be enclosed by
a removable chain guard, constructed of a minimum 14-gage
hot-dip galvanized steel and conform to OSHA requirements.
Worm Gear: The special worm assembly shall consist of a through
hardened and ground alloy steel worm and a centrifugally cast bronze
worm gear. The worm gear assembly shall be self-contained and
enclosed in a cast iron gear case and provided complete with oil fill,
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
6.
level, and drain fittings and a sight gage. The drain shall be at the lowest
point of the oil reservoir and shall be accessible.
a.
The worm shall be cast integrally with the worm shaft. Designs
which use a separate gear, keyed to the shaft, will not be
considered. The worm gear torque capacity shall be determined
according to AGMA 6034-A for service factor of 1.25 applied to
the continuous operating torque.
Pinion Gear: The pinion and pinion shaft which drive the internal spur
gear shall be made as an integral unit from heat treated forged alloy
steel and designed in accordance with AGMA 6010-E. The pinion shall
be rigidly supported by bearings located above and below the pinion
gear. Overhung pinions shall not be acceptable.
Spur Gear Assembly: The spur gear shall be AGMA Quality 5 and shall
be designed and rated in accordance with AGMA 2001-B. If the spur
gear is of a split gear design, the two halves shall be provided with
precision mating surfaces with self-registering and indexed fits.
a.
The spur gear housing shall be made of cast iron. A felt or
neoprene seal and dust shield shall be included with each spur
gear housing in two locations; a lower seal located between the
stationary drive base and main gear and an upper seal located
between the main gear and stationary drive cover. The spur gear
housing shall be designed to allow submergence of the gear face
in the oil bath sufficient to provide complete lubrication of the
gear assembly. When the main spur gear is manufactured from
forged steel, a minimum 75 percent of the gear face shall be
submerged in oil. The gear case shall be complete with an oil fill
and drain components. Drain piping shall tap the lowest point in
the oil reservoir for removal of oil and condensate, shall be
valved, and shall be conveniently accessible. An extension
operator shall be provided for operation of the drain valve from
the walkway level above. A dip stick or sight glass extending
from the walkway level to the bottom of the drain shall be
provided to indicate oil level and the presence of condensate.
b.
The drive assembly shall be firmly mounted to a cast iron
turntable base with a minimum wall thickness of 1 inch. The drive
base shall be mounted on the center column and be provided with
a positive leveling feature. The drive base shall be suitable for
supporting the entire load of the drive mechanism and access
bridge. To permit inspection and maintenance of components in
the interior of the drive unit housing, each assembly shall have an
access opening of not less than 22 inches in diameter. Cover plate
with lifting eyes securely attached shall be provided for the
opening.
Main Bearing: The entire sludge collector mechanism shall be
suspended from the turntable which in turn shall be supported on a ball
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
7.
8.
F.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
G.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
H.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
B.
Anchor Bolts: Design of the anchor bolts of the new influent column is the
responsibility of the manufacturer. All anchor bolts shall be made of Type 304
stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, and
washers required for the equipment.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Operating Tests:
1.
2.
C.
The primary clarifier tank shall be filled with non-potable water to its
operating level and the mechanism operated continuously at its
maximum speed for a period of not less than 48 hours. At no time
during the operating test shall the equipment fail on torque overload or
exhibit indications of binding or uneven operation. The Contractor shall
record torque values as registered on the drive mechanism torque
indicator and motor amperage (all three phases) at 3-hour intervals.
If the mechanism should fail on torque overload or, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the mechanism should exhibit indications of binding or
improper adjustment; the Contractor shall immediately halt the tests and
remedy the problem. After completion of necessary repairs or
adjustments, the tests shall be repeated. Failure to successfully complete
the test in six attempts shall be considered sufficient cause for rejection.
Torque Test: The Contractor shall load test the entire collector mechanism by
anchoring the clarifier truss arms individually. Each truss arm shall be tested
individually by using a single attachment point at the end of the arm to
achieve a point load condition during the test. In successive tests, the
Contractor shall demonstrate the sludge collection mechanisms (including
drive unit, cage, gears and structures) capability to withstand all loads and
stresses associated with the cut-out torque. Prior to initiating the test, the
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with sketches and calculations
illustrating the test procedure and demonstrating how the specified torque will
be applied to satisfy this requirement.
END OF SECTION
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 56.01
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 1
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
2.03
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group, and division
location in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.
E.
MANUFACTURES
A.
WEMCO Hidrostal.
B.
Hayward Gordon.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
2.04
COMPONENTS
A.
Equipment consists of pump complete with motor, control system, guide rail,
anchoring brackets, base elbow, power cable, and pump lifting cable.
B.
Characteristics:
1.
2.
Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump.
Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O-rings.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 3
3.
C.
Lifting Arrangement:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.
E.
Oil chamber between seals shall be equipped with drain and inspection plug.
Plug shall have positive antileak seal and shall be easily accessible from
outside.
F.
G.
Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump
application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for
pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes
without strain or splicing.
H.
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
I.
2.05
2.06
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A.
Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch diestamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.
B.
Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Prepare, and prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating.
B.
Pump:
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 5
b.
2.
3.
B.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Mount the discharge elbow to the floor of the wetwell floor with stainless steel
bolts.
C.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
3.04
Include test data sheets, curve test results, and performance test
logs.
Conduct on each pump.
Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at 2/3, 1/3,
and shutoff conditions.
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
C.
D.
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.05
E.
F.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are part of this
Specification.
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 7
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): WAS (Activated Sludge)
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F:
Min 45
Max 70
pH: 6 to 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Constant (Y/N): N
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 1
Other:
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Other:
Voltage: 460
Phase: 3
Enclosure: EXP
CLASSIFICATION: Unclassified
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 800 min to 1800 max, See Section 26 29 23, Low
Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
Other Features:
Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y
Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y
REMARKS:
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 3
SECTION 44 42 56.03
VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS HANDLING PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
9.
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
2.02
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
SHAFT SEALS
A.
Sealing system for vertical turbine solids handling pump shafts shall be
mechanical seal.
B.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2)
10.
11.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.04
2.05
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.
2.06
Near-white blast clean surface preparation with 2 coats, 16 mil total dry
film thickness, of coal tar epoxy, Carboline 300M or equal. Provide a
prime coat if recommended by the coating manufacturer.
Provide the coal tar epoxy coating to the outside of the bowl, inside and
outside of the column, outside of tube and inside and outside of the
discharge head.
B.
C.
Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results.
D.
E.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
f.
5.
F.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.
C.
Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not
compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.
D.
After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after
grout is set and pack void with grout.
E.
F.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
3.05
Vibration Test:
a.
Test with unit installed and in normal operation, and discharging
to connected piping systems at rates between low discharge head
and high discharge head conditions specified, and with actual
building structures and foundations provided shall not develop
vibration exceeding 80 percent of limits specified in HIS 9.6.4.
b.
If unit exhibits vibration in excess of limits specified, adjust or
modify as necessary. Unit that cannot be adjusted or modified to
conform as specified shall be replaced.
Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes.
Test for continuous 2-hour period.
Test Report Requirements: In accordance with HIS 14.6.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Return Activated Sludge (max. 1% total
suspended solids)
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal 68
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0
Max 85
Min 55
Viscosity Range:
pH: 6.5-8
Abrasive (Y/N): Y
Caused by:
Corrosive (Y/N): N
Caused by:
3,000 - 10,000 .
Outdoor (Y/N): Y
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 5,600
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 30
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Impeller:
Type: Enclosed solids handling type
Material: One-piece case iron ASTM A48 CL30
Impeller Wear Rings: ASTM A743 CA15 190-241 Bhn or ASTM A743 CA40
300-350 Bhn
Head Shaft Material: Type 416 SST
Shaft Sealing:
Packing (Y/N) N
Mechanical (Y/N) Y
Type: Split
Seal Lubrication: Water (plant effluent)
Coupling: Falk (Y/N)
Fast: (Y/N)
Spring-Grid (Y/N)
Spacer (Y/N)
Soleplate: Provide for support of pump assembly, including thrust and dynamic loads,
as indicated. Top of soleplate shall be faced, drilled, and tapped for pump baseplate.
Motor Base Material:
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 60
Voltage: 460
Phase: 3
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Mounting Type:
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Mixed Liquor (max. 0.5% total
suspended solids)
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal 68
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0
Max 85
Min 55
Viscosity Range:
pH: 6.5-8
Abrasive (Y/N):
Caused by:
Corrosive (Y/N): N
Caused by:
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Outdoor (Y/N): Y
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Performance requirement shall be dependent on contractors selection of mixed liquor
transfer pump forcemain diameter per note on drawing W-YRD-ME-0435.
14 Diameter Forcemain:
Minimum: 2140
Minimum: 7
16 Diameter Forcemain:
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 5,350
Minimum: 2140
Minimum: 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Discharge Head:
Type: Aboveground, three section mitred, designed to prevent the collection
of stringy material by the use of a splitter vane.
Material: Fabricated Steel, ASTM A36/A36M
Discharge Nozzle Size (inches): 16
Flange Standard/Class: 150 pound ANSI
Impeller:
Type: Enclosed or semi open
Material: One-piece cast iron ASTM A48 CL30 or Bronze
Impeller Wear Rings: ASTM A743 CA15 190-241 Bhn or ASTM A743 CA40
300-350 Bhn
Head Shaft Material: Type 416 SST
Shaft Sealing:
Packing (Y/N) N
Mechanical (Y/N) Y
Type: Split
Seal Lubrication: Recycled Plant Effluent
Coupling: Falk (Y/N) ___N___ Fast: (Y/N) _N_____ Spring-Grid (Y/N) ____N__
Gear Type (Y/N) __N____ Spacer (Y/N) __Y____
Manufacturer Standard (Y/N) _____
Baseplate Material:
Sole Plate (Y/N) __Y____ Material Carbon Steel
Soleplate: Provide for support of pump assembly, including thrust and dynamic loads,
as indicated. Top of soleplate shall be faced, drilled, and tapped for pump baseplate.
Motor Base Material:
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 40
Voltage: 460
Phase: 3
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 56.05
HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBERS:
THK-PMP-P-71031: Fermentation Mixing Pump 1
THK-PMP-P-71032: Fermentation Mixing Pump 2
THK-PMP-P-71033: Fermentation Mixing Pump 3
PART 1
2.01
2.02
GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.
The Work of this section includes providing pump mixing systems as defined
herein and all appurtenant Work.
B.
Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the Primary Sludge Fermentation
tank mixing, complete with all accessories and appurtenances (including, but
not necessarily limited to, electric motors, safety guards, and spare parts) be
supplied by one responsible system manufacturer or responsible system
supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain each system
from the responsible supplier of the equipment. The supplier shall furnish all
components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease of
operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in
operation in conformance with the specified performance, features, and
functions indicated without altering or modifying the Contractors
responsibility under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to
the Owner for providing the equipment systems as specified herein.
C.
DEFINITIONS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower
demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of
the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately
the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and
minimum submergence required at the guarantee point.
d.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings showing
the equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and
weights of associated mixing system and recirculation equipment.
e.
Motor information as specified in Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage
AC Induction Motors.
f.
Factory finish system data sheets.
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) analysis that models the flows
within each Primary Sludge Fermentation tank verifying that nozzle
location and orientation provides adequate mixing of the tank contents,
under service conditions specified herein. Adequate mixing shall be
provided to obtain suspended solids concentrations within 10 percent of
the average value regardless of location inside the tank. Model must
contain all structural and mechanical elements.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Factory Functional and Performance Test Reports and Log from actual
mixing pumps that will be used in the mixed systems for this Project.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that the factory finish
system is identical to the requirements specified herein.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 1 year. Include a list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
9.
2.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2
3.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
3.02
If anchorage and support details, locations, sizes and materials are not
identified by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall provide support and
anchorage calculations stamped by an engineer registered in the state of
the project. Anchorage and support design criteria shall meet
manufacturers requirements, design loads provided in the General
Structural Notes on the Drawings, and all applicable codes and
standards. Provide ICC-ES report and special inspection requirements
for any post installed anchors in concrete and masonry. Anchor
calculations shall account for edge distance, concrete thickness and
other existing conditions which shall be field verified by the Contractor
and identified in the calculations and any related Drawings.
The Contractor shall furnish two complete mixing system, for two Primary
Sludge Fermentation Tanks, consisting of six floor-mounted mixing nozzle
assemblies in each tank, and three associated chopper pumps. The dimensions
of fermentation tanks shall be as shown on the Drawings. The nozzles shall be
designed to produce a rotational mixing pattern within the tank. The
manufacturer shall be responsible for determining mixing assembly quantity,
location, appropriate nozzle angles, and hydraulic performance of the pumps
and system as a whole. Mixing system shall be designed to adequately mix the
tank as specified under Article 3.03.C, with inner structural and mechanical
elements including but not limiting to concrete fillets and weirs, as shown on
Contract Drawings.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
B.
Service Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
D.
E.
Nozzle Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.03
Nozzles: Shall be glass-lined cast ductile iron, with 1.0 inch nominal
wall thickness to protect against abrasive conditions, and a long straight
taper length of at least 10 inches.
Assembly Fittings: Shall be glass-lined cast ductile iron, with 150 pound
flanged piping connection.
Base: Shall be fabricated carbon steel, with -inch mounting holes for
5/8-inch anchor bolts.
Anchor Bolts: Shall be 5/8 -inch diameter minimum and sized by the
equipment supplier, and of sufficient length to support thrust loads from
nozzles. Construction shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
CHOPPER PUMPS
A.
PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
B.
Pump shall be direct driven. Pump and motor orientation shall not
compromise clearance shown on mechanical Drawings for equipment
access.
Pump Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
3.04
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.05
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
3.06
Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, System No. 5.
B.
Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment and control panels actually
furnished.
C.
Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results, performance
test logs, certified correct by a registered professional Engineer.
D.
E.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit
before final assembly.
Limits:
a.
Driving Unit Alone: Less than 80 percent of NEMA MG 1 limits.
b.
Complete Rotating Assembly, Including Coupling and Motor:
Less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic
Institute Standards.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
PART 3
4.01
4.02
Hydrostatic Tests: Pump casing(s) tested at 150 percent of shutoff head. Test
pressure maintained for not less than 5 minutes.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4-inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level
bearing surface for the pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so that
there is no change of level or springing of the baseplate when the anchor bolts
are tightened.
C.
Adjust pump assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned,
plumb, and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and
couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.
D.
After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and
the concrete foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper
category, as specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove
wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout.
E.
F.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
B.
PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.03
3.
B.
C.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 56.06
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06- 1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group, and division
location in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.
E.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
2.03
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump.
Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O-rings.
Pumps fitted with dynamically balanced nonclog impellers designed to
pass course solids and stringy materials.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06- 3
D.
Oil chamber between seals shall be equipped with drain and inspection plug.
Plug shall have positive antileak seal and shall be easily accessible from
outside.
E.
F.
Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for immersible pump
application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for
pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes
without strain or splicing.
G.
Motor Protection Module: provide pump with a motor protection module for
remote mounting. Contract Drawings are based on first named immersible
pump manufacturer and motor protection module. If pump and motor
protection module other than first named manufacturer is provided, provide
revised wiring for the motor protection module.
1.
2.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A.
Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch diestamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.
B.
Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
2.06
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating.
B.
Pump:
1.
2.
3.
B.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06- 5
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
3.05
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are part of this
Specification.
1.
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Sludge Thickening Filtrate
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F:
Max 70
Min 45
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 SUPPLEMENT - 1
Other:
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 SUPPLEMENT - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Other:
Voltage: 460
CLASSIFICATION: Unclassified
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: ___650_____ min to ____855____ max, See
Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.
Other Features:
Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y
Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y
REMARKS:
When viewed from drive end, the discharge position shall be #13, counterclockwise rotation
for Fairbanks Morse pumps, or position 5, left hand rotation for Grundfos (Yeomans) pumps.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 SUPPLEMENT - 3
SECTION 44 42 56.09
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each pump assembly.
b.
Complete pump and motor catalog information, descriptive
literature, specifications, and identification of materials of
construction.
c.
Performance data curves at nominal pump speed showing head,
capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump
efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to
maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower
demand, NPSHR, and overall efficiency required at Rated
Conditions and at Secondary Conditions (if applicable).
d.
Certified detail structural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings
showing equipment dimensions, arrangement, assembly, including
locations and type of connections and weights of major equipment
and components.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 1
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
2.03
EQUIPMENT
A.
Pump:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Casing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 3
C.
D.
2.
3.
E.
5.
6.
F.
Impeller:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
G.
Shaft:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Pump Base: Rugged, heavy duty, with ample strength for support of entire
pump and imposed static and operational loads.
I.
Coupling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
2.
K.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 5
2.04
2.05
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.06
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.
C.
Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do
not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.
D.
After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after
grout is set and pack void with grout.
E.
F.
Functional Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 7
3.03
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
3.04
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Sludge Thickening Filtrate
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60
Max:
70
Min: 45
0.25 psi
pH:
5 to 7
caused by ______
caused by ______
6 HP max. Secondary:
3.5 HP max
NPSH Required, Max. (Ft Absolute) at Rated Point: _25 feet; Secondary: 15 feet
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 1
Single Volute: Y
Tangential Discharge: Y
Impeller:
Enclosed:
No ______
Yes ______ No
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 2
Type: ______
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Packing: ______
Mechanical Seal: ___Y___ Single: ______ Double: ___Y___
Mechanical Seal Manufacturer/Model: ______
Lubrication: _Flush water_____
Extension:
Shafting:
Materials:
Type 4140 Alloy Steel ______ Type 304 Stainless Steel ______
Shaft Sleeve: Hardened Stainless Steel
Packing:
Lantern Ring:
Follower Gland:
EPT ______
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 3
Extension
Shafting:
60
CISD-TEFC _____
Adjustable Speed Drive: __1150____ min to _1750_____ max. See Section 26 29 23,
Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.
REMARKS Pump rotation and position shall be as shown on the Drawings. Suction and
Discharge connections shown on the Drawings are based on first named manufacturers.
Coordinate with pump manufacturer and modify fittings as necessary to connect to pumps if
suction and discharge sizes are different.
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 56.13
PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower and
demand over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff
to maximum capacity.
d.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing
the equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and
weights of associated equipment.
e.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
f.
Complete motor data, as required by Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
g.
Factory finish system.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
h.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
2.02
2.03
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
B.
ACCESSORIES
A.
4.
5.
Stator thermal protection (run dry protection) shall shut pump down
before stator damage occurs.
Provide thermowell drilled and tapped into stator and thermocouple for
measurement of temperature at pump stator to rotor interface.
Provide temperature controller in NEMA 4X enclosure, with dual
display for stator temperature and alarm set-point with adjustable
hysteresis to prevent on/off cycling of pump when coming off an alarm.
Temperature controller shall have a 120 Vac rated, normally open, dry
contact, that closes when temperature sensor reaches alarm set-point.
Provide thermocouple cable between thermocouple and temperature
controller.
B.
C.
D.
Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as
specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.
E.
Pump Drive: The pump drive shall be a gear-type universal joint or pin joint.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
2.04
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.05
Prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating.
B.
Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment and control panels actually
furnished.
C.
Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results, and
performance test logs.
D.
E.
F.
6.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of the baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.
C.
Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not
compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.
D.
After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after
grout is set and pack void with grout.
E.
F.
G.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
B.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
3.05
SUPPLEMENT
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Polymer solution, 0.2% to 1% concentration
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 70
Max: 80
Min: 50
US gpm at 90 psi.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
Constant (Y/N):
Adjustable (Y/N): Y
Pump Stages:
Connections:
Suction: Flanged: X Flange Type:
Discharge: Flanged: X Flange Type:
Open-Throat:
Screwed:
Screwed:
Suction Port:
Stator Material: Fluoroelastomer 70 Durometer, or Viton Stator Thermal Protection
(Y/N): Y
Rotor Material: Type 316 SST Chrome Plated, duktil coated
Drive Shaft Material:
Material:
Material:
N
N
Y
Material:
Type: single, flushless
Falk (Y/N):
Gear Type (Y/N):
Baseplate: Design:
Drive Type:
Direct-Coupled: X Belt:
Close Coupled Gear Reducer:
Lubrication:
Fast (Y/N):
Manufacturer Standard (Y/N):
Material: Steel
Hydrostatic Adjustable Speed:
Other:
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
Voltage: 460
Phase: 3
EXP
ODP
TEFC X CISD-TEFC
TENV
Vertical Z:
C-Face Mounted:
WPI
Piggy Back:
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 56.14
LOBE PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
5.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower
demand, and pump efficiency over entire operating range of
pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately the
head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and
minimum submergence required at guarantee point.
d.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings showing
equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and
weights of associated equipment.
e.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
f.
Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor
manufacturer, and including motor modifications.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 1
g.
h.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Vogelsang.
Boerger.
LobePro.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Pump Design:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 3
9.
C.
Pump Castings:
1.
2.
D.
Wear Plates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Rear of pump rotor casing and front cover shall be protected with
replaceable wear plates having a minimum Brinell hardness of 500.
Front cover wear plate shall be reversible.
Wear Plate Bolts: Bolts that secure wear plates to castings inside pump
assembly shall be stainless steel, hex head type.
Materials for wear plates and radial liners, if included:
a.
Fabricated of hardened steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THKPMP-P-63111 and THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Fabricated of stainless steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THKPMP-P-63113 and THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge
Pumps THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.
Rotors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
F.
Shafts:
1.
2.
G.
Mechanical Seals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
end of the specification section. The sludge contain organic solids, small
inorganic particles, and grit.
Materials:
a.
Fabricated of Buna-N at an average durometer hardness of 70 as
per ASTM D2240 for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P63111 and THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Fabricated of EPDM for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P63113 and THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge Pumps
THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.
Quench/Blocking Chamber:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 5
I.
J.
K.
Bearings:
1.
2.
L.
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
M.
Gear Reducer:
1.
N.
2.03
Structural Base: Rotary lobe pump, gear reducer, motor or gear motor shall be
mounted on a structural steel baseplate, with structural channel supports as
necessary, complete with couplings, guards, and mounting hardware.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.
2.04
B.
C.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.05
In-line gear reducer designated for continuous duty at heavy shock load.
a.
Meet AGMA Class II, with service factor of 1.4 minimum for
pump applications with moderate shock, continuous duty and
AGMA Class III, with service factor of 2.0 minimum for heavy
shock, continuous duty operation.
b.
C-face, mounted with C-face drive motor to form integral gear
motor combination.
Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, using Manufacturers standard industrial protective coatings
B.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 7
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.
C.
Adjust pump assemblies so driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and
level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not
compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.
D.
After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, if recommended by pump manufacturer, grout space
between bottom of baseplate and concrete foundation with a poured,
nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 62 00,
Nonshrink Grouting. Remove leveling wedges after grout is set and pack void
left with grout.
E.
F.
G.
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.03
Functional Tests:
1.
2.
B.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 8
3.
4.
3.04
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
3.05
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 9
Min 50
Viscosity Range: 1 cp
Max 85
Max 160
Min 140
Viscosity Range: 1 cp
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 1
Voltage: 460
Phase: 3
Inverter Duty: Y
ODP _____
TEFC X
TENV _____
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 10 percent min to 100 percent max, see Section
26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
REMARKS
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 2
PROJNUMBER
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
In normal operation:
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Thickened fermented primary sludge for
THK-PMP-P-63114; thickened fermented primary sludge or thickened waste
activated sludge for THK-PMP-P-63113
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 65
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.0
Max 85
Min 50
Viscosity Range: 1 cp
Max 160
Min 140
Viscosity Range: 1 cp
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 3
200
Phase: 3
Inverter Duty: Y
TENV _____
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 10 percent min to 100 percent max, see Section
26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
REMARKS
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 4
PROJNUMBER
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Max 85
Min 50
Viscosity Range: 1 cp
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 5
Phase: 3
Inverter Duty: Y
TENV _____
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 10 percent min to 100 percent max, see Section 26 29
23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
REMARKS
LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 6
PROJNUMBER
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 56.18
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
b.
Detailed mechanical and electrical Drawings showing equipment
dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights of
associated equipment.
c.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
d.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, and horsepower
demand over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to
maximum capacity. Indicate head, capacity, and horsepower
demand required at guarantee point.
e.
Listing of extra materials supplied for this section.
f.
Factory finish system.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
ISO 9001-2000.
UL610101A.
To maximize pump efficiency and minimize tube fatigue that will impact life,
performance, and accuracy, pumps must be designed not to exceed the
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 1
For quality assurance, all pump elements must be manufactured by the pump
manufacturer in accordance with their specifications.
C.
Drive and pump heads shall be 24 hr continuous duty rated and have a threeyear manufacturer's warranty from date of shipment.
D.
E.
F.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
Pumps shall be positive displacement peristaltic type complete with springloaded pumphead, self-contained variable speed drive, and flexible extruded
tube as specified.
B.
C.
Pumps shall be dry self-priming, capable of being run dry without damaging
effects to pump or tube, and shall have a maximum suction lift capability of
up to 30 feet vertical water column. Maximum pressure rating: 60 psi.
D.
Pump shall not require the use of check valves or diaphragms and shall not
require dynamic seals in contact with the pumped fluid. Process fluid shall be
contained within pump tubing and shall not directly contact any rotary or
metallic components.
E.
Flow shall be in the direction of the rotor rotation, which can be reversed and
shall be proportional to rotor speed.
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.02
PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A.
Pumphead:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 3
4)
5)
B.
Tubing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Pump shall be supplied with a Load Sure tubing element with molded
fittings, which shall be self-locating when fitted into the pumphead.
Tube element shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track
(housing) through an angle of 180 degrees and be held in place on the
suction and discharge by the element fittings. The tubing shall be
replaceable without the use of tools and with no disassembly of the
pumphead. To achieve maximum service life, pump heads with a track
angle of less than 180 degrees and/or without tube elements are not
acceptable.
Load Sure Element shall be constructed with either Marprene or
Sta-Pure tubing with male PVDF Quick Release Connectors.
Supply two (2) tube elements of the specified size per pump.
Supply One (1) meter of reinforced transparent PVC flexible hose for
connection of pump to suction and discharge process lines. Flexible
hose shall have a PVDF female Quick Release fitting for connection to
the tube Element and male quick release fitting for connection to barbed
adaptor with built-in shut off valve for ease of maintenance and
connection to process lines.
Drive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
c.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 5
15.
16.
17.
D.
Spares
1.
2.
2.03
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.06
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.05
Supply two spare tube elements of the specified size per pump.
Supply one spare pumphead assembly and rotor.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
2.04
Prepare, and prime and finish coat using Manufacturers standard industrial
protective coatings.
Factory Tests:
1.
Pumps: Assemble, check, and shim all pumps for the specific
application prior to shipment.
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Contractor shall supply shielded signal wiring for wiring of the required
remote input and output to the connectors.
C.
B.
Functional Tests:
1.
3.03
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
3.04
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 7
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Ferrous chloride solution 28-34%
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 68
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F:
Max 85
Min
32
Viscosity Range:
1.2
pH: <1
Abrasive (Y/N): N
REMARKS
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 SUPPLEMENT - 1
SECTION 44 42 56.19
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)
Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump: AER-PMP-P-30825
Aeration Basin 6 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump: AER-PMP-P-30826
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.
The Work of this section includes providing the axial-flow pumps and all
appurtenant work.
B.
Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the aeration basin mixed liquor
recycle pumps, complete with all accessories and appurtenances (including,
but not necessarily limited to, electric motors, mast assemblies, and
components), be the end product of one responsible system manufacturer or
responsible system supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall
obtain each system from the responsible supplier of the equipment, which
supplier shall furnish all components and accessories of the system to enhance
compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place
the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified performance,
features and functions without altering or modifying the Contractors
responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible
to the Owner for providing the equipment systems as specified herein.
C.
REFERENCES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 1
9.
10.
11.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 2
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.04
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel with the exception of the
motor housing and gear box. Wetted parts are defined as any parts extending
below the top of aeration basin walls.
B.
Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection and design of
components where so indicated in individual sections. When not indicated
there, minimum service factors shall be 1.25, except for gears and gear drives
as specified herein.
C.
Safety Devices: The completed work shall include all necessary permanent
safety devices, such as machinery guards, emergency stops and similar items
required by OSHA, and other federal, state, and local health and safety
regulations.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 3
E.
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Except as otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiralbevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA
Standards, with a minimum service factor of 2, a minimum L-10 bearing
life of 100,000 hours based on full motor nameplate horsepower and a
minimum efficiency of 94 percent.
Allowable Types:
a.
Gear reduction units are required for the mixers; gear speed
reducers or increasers shall be of the double reduction inline type,
oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed. The casing shall be of
cast iron or heavy-duty steel construction with lifting lugs and an
inspection cover for each gear train. An oil drain and inspection
plug shall be provided and installed for easy access.
b.
Gearbox may be one-stage planetary reduction gear, with a
service factor of 2.0. The motor shaft shall be provided with a
spline to attach to the gear reducer. The reduction stage shall
consist of an integral toothed ring gear to which three planet
wheels are mounted on the planet carriers, engaging with the
pinion.
Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped
fully assembled for field installation.
Material selections shall comply with AGMA values and the
manufacturers recommendations.
The area where the propeller shaft enters the pumped media shall be
sealed by two totally independent mechanical shaft seals, each with its
own independent single spring system. The outer mechanical seal shall
be protected from solids in the pumped media by a labyrinth cast into
the propeller hub/seal housing interface. An oil-filled chamber with
drain and inspection plug (each with positive anti-leak seal) shall
separate the seals and provide lubrication. Single mechanical seals or
rotary lip seals shall not be considered adequate for this critical sealing
area.
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 4
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
G.
2.03
2.04
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
A.
General: Design the axial-flow pump for continuous full load duty and
guarantee the mixers based on the design conditions specified on the data
sheet. Design and construct all units to permit economical maintenance. Select
all units to allow as much interchangeability of parts as possible. Unspecified
details of design and construction of the mixing unit will be manufacturers
standard.
B.
Spool Piece: Provide a spool piece between the axial flow pump and concrete
wall. The spool piece is to be sized to accommodate the axial flow pump and
be of a length allowing the pump to be positioned for removal from the basin.
Include pipe supports for the spool piece as per manufacturers
recommendation.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 5
B.
Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.05
Provide one (1) portable lifting davit suitable for use with all pumps in this
section. The davit shall be designed to be mounted in a floor socket next to the
pump mast. Design and provide one (1) floor socket for each pump location,
four (4) total. The lifting davit shall include a manual brake winch, and shall
be adequately rated to lift the pump and support arm off the mast and directly
onto the adjacent deck surface. A removable section of handrail shall be
provided by Contractor such that the pump does not need to be lifted over the
handrail. A lifting cable, permanently attached to each pump, shall be
provided in sufficient length for attachment of the upper end to the winch
cable reel when the davit assembly is installed. Provide storage area for cable
when davit is not installed.
B.
Materials:
1.
2.
2.06
2.07
Motors: Provide as indicated on pump data sheets at the end of this section.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 6
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.08
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
2.09
The final acceptance of the equipment requires a field test for handling the
specified fluid under specified conditions.
B.
Furnish for each unit, certified performance curves that show efficiency, speed
range, brake horsepower, at no extra charge.
C.
Make available to the Owner without charge, all test records, whether test
witnessing is required or not on the Data Sheet.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
Prepare surface and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coatings, System No. 2.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide stainless steel mounting bolts, washers, and nuts and install the
equipment at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
C.
Lubricants: The installation includes oil and grease for initial operation.
3.03
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 7
B.
Training Services:
1.
2.
3.
3.04
FIELD FINISHING
A.
3.05
Solvent clean and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating, System No. 2.
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 8
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
PUMP NAME
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump AER-PMP-P-30825
Aeration Basin 6 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump AER-PMP-P-30826
SPEED TYPE
Variable
Variable
MODEL
Amaline P480
AXP-I
PUMP MANUFACTURERS
KSB
Landia, Inc.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Rated Capacity:
11,000
gpm
Head at Rated Capacity:
1.8
feet
Maximum Propeller Speed
510 rpm
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped:
Mixed Liquor
Largest Solid:
3 inches
Pumping Temperature (PT):
70 degrees F
Specific Gravity at PT:
1
Viscosity at PT:
53 cp
Minimum NPSHA at PT:
90 feet absolute
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Oil
MOTOR DATA
X One
1,800
rpm
Two
Multispeed, Two-speed:
Constant Torque
Vertical
rpm
Variable Torque
Shaft
Split
Hollow
Upthrust:
High (<30%)
Special Features: Manufacturer to provide the motor seal failure moisture detection, thermal sensor,
and interfacing relay. Pumps may be operated by AFD in future, pumps shall be Inverter Duty Rated.
PW\WBG\42399
4/2/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 42 73.01
THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.02
Installers Information:
a.
Include list of technical personnel who will perform work on liner.
b.
Technician certification, indicating that technician has completed
required training for welding, fabricating, and installing liner.
Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Written test reports of each test and inspection.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Composition:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
D.
Physical Properties:
1.
2.
3.
E.
2.03
2.04
Lining system including sheets, joint, corner and welding strips initially
tested at 77 degrees F plus or minus 5 degrees F:
a.
Minimum Tensile Strength: 2,200 psi in accordance with
ASTM D638.
b.
Minimum Elongation: 200 percent in accordance with
ASTM D638.
Pull Test for Locking Extensions: Liner plate locking extensions for
embedment in concrete shall withstand test pull of at least 100 pounds
per linear inch or 250 pounds per anchor for individual conical anchors,
applied perpendicularly to face of sheet for period of 1 minute, without
rupture or pullout of extensions. Perform test at temperature of
70 degrees F to 80 degrees F.
Liner Sheet: Minimum 0.078 inch thick with locking extensions of same
material.
Furnish lining system free from cracks, cleavages, or other defects. Liner sheet
shall be impact resistance, flexible, and capable of being repaired during life
of structure.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
FABRICATION
A.
2.
B.
Basic Sheets:
1.
2.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.05
Factory Inspections: Inspect liner sheets for holes using electrical spark tester
set at 20,000 volts. Repair holes found in liner sheets in shop and retest prior
to shipment.
B.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.
3.
4.
Closely fit and secure liner sheets to inner forms in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions. Cut sheets to fit curved and warped
surfaces using minimum number of separate pieces. Weld 2-inch-wide
water-resistant tape or welding strip on back of butt joints to prevent wet
concrete from flowing around edges.
Return lining minimum 3 inches at surfaces of contact between concrete
structure and items not of concrete, for example, manhole frames, gate
guides, or brick manholes, and clay or cast-iron pipes. Follow same
procedure at joints where type of protective lining is changed or new
work is built to join existing unlined concrete. Seal return liner at each
return to item in contact with plastic-lined concrete.
Install liner continuous over expansion or control joints per approved
Shop Drawings.
Join lining in accordance with manufacturers instructions and to
provide flexibility and excess material to allow for differential
movement.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
C.
Protect lining from damage when removing forms. Do not use sharp
instruments to pry forms from lined surfaces. Pull remaining nails from lining
without tearing and clearly mark resulting holes. Mark areas of abrasion,
damaged surfaces, and form tie holes before ties are broken off.
D.
Patching:
1.
2.
3.
3.02
3.03
Patch torn, cut, seriously abraded areas, nail, and tie holes in lining.
Fuse welding strip patches to liner over entire patch area.
Continuously seal around larger patches with welding strip fused to
patch and sound lining surrounding damaged area.
After placement of concrete and removal of forms, test field joints and patches
for holes using electrical spark tester set at 20,000 volts. Repair discontinuities
and retest.
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
SECTION 44 44 63.03
DRY AND LIQUID POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.02
This section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install two dry and
liquid polymer mix/feed systems capable of metering, diluting, and activating
liquid or dry polymer with water at the specified concentrations.
GENERAL
A.
B.
Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one
manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation,
maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service.
C.
Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the polymer feed systems,
complete with all accessories and appurtenances, be the end product of one
responsible system manufacturer or responsible system supplier. Unless
otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain each system from the
responsible supplier of the equipment, which supplier shall furnish all
components and accessories as necessary to place the equipment in operation
in conformance with the specified performance, features, and functions
indicated without altering or modifying the Contractor's responsibilities under
the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for
providing the equipment systems as specified herein.
D.
E.
The design of the polymer system as shown on the Contract Drawings is based
upon the first-named manufacturer listed in this Specification. Manufacturers
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
Layout of polymer skids including dry polymer storage tank, mix tank,
feed tank, and liquid polymer feed pump to coordination with the
specified grating system and supports within the polymer room.
Changes in electrical requirements including breaker sizing for control
panels, wiring sizing, number of wires and conduits, and changes in
motor horsepower requirements.
Relocation of equipment pads and changes in sizes to accommodate
alternate equipment.
Coordination of the height of the dry polymer feeder to accommodate
750-kg bag unloading.
Instrumentation and control interface requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Catalog cuts for all components including water pressure and flow
sensing and regulating devices, electrical controls and
components, solenoid valves and motors.
b.
Manufacturer's literature for the liquid polymer metering pump
indicating the specific model proposed.
c.
Polymer feed system O&M Manual describing the function of
each component and the operating and control strategy for the
complete system.
d.
Installation list for the model type proposed including a contact
name, phone and date of installation.
e.
Bill of Materials listing part numbers, name, and material of
construction.
f.
Performance data including mixing energy data at maximum and
minimum flow.
g.
Details of DC/SCR drive system including rating, special features,
operating description, and schematic (elementary) wiring diagram.
h.
Point-to-point wiring and control schematic diagrams shall
conform to the format and content requirements contained in
Section 40 99 90, Package Control Systems.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
1.04
B.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
1.05
WARRANTY
A.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
2.02
2.03
2.04
The use of a manufacturers name and model or catalog number is for the
purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration
desired. Products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance
with the General Conditions.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Or equal.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Dry Polymer
Liquid Polymer
Pumping Temperature
50 degrees F to 70 degrees F
Viscosity
Dilution Water
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Dry Polymer Usage
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
System Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
6.
C.
Polymer Activation:
1.
2.
3.
2.06
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide a 4-cubic foot, dry product storage hopper. The top of the
hopper shall not exceed 70 inches from the equipment base, without
modifying the equipment pad to accommodate a taller unit. The hopper
shall have a gasketed lid with bag adapter to interface with bulk polymer
bags. The hopper will sit on top of the volumetric feeder.
The hopper shall be fabricated of a not less than 12-gauge Type 304
stainless steel, rectangular construction, with the lower portion of the
hopper tapering to facilitate flow of the dry product to the ensuing screw
feeder.
The storage hopper shall include a proximity or paddle type switch to
sense low product level.
Provide a stainless steel screen in the hopper to prevent foreign material
from entering auger. The screen shall have 1/4-inch square area
openings and constructed of 12-gauge wire.
Each system shall have a bulk bag frame, an I-beam, a hoist and trolley
to hold and feed bulk polymer bags. They shall conform to the
following:
a.
capable of loading polymer bags of up to 2000-poundcapacity..
b.
Epoxy coated steel frame and I-beam.
c.
Height of 185 inches maximum from the equipment base.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
d.
e.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Each system shall have a lift bar that can attach to a polymer bag
and be lifted into place via fork truck or overhead crane.
The hoist and trolley shall be motorized, with hand held operator
with 16-inch cord chain holder, and utilize 480V ac/threephase/60 Hz power.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.
3.
E.
The metering pump shall have an output capacity sufficient to meet the
performance requirements at a neat polymer concentration of 40 percent
active polymer with a maximum shaft speed of 300 rpm. The pump shall
be suitable to pump the liquid polymer through a 1-1/2-inch Schedule 80
PVC suction pipe up to 35 feet long and a 5/8-inch I.D. tubing provided
by the polymer system supplier up to 20 feet long. The suction lift shall
be up to 10 feet.
The liquid polymer pump shall be provided with a 460V/3PH/60Hz
constant speed 1/2 hp, 1,750 rpm motor coupled to an inline gear
reducer. Motor shall be TEFC and conform to Section 26 20 00, LowVoltage AC Induction Motors.
An integrally mounted graduated cylinder shall be provided with
necessary valves for startup calibration. The calibration column shall be
rigidly mounted to the systems skid. The calibration column shall
provide 1-minute draw down for the next polymer pump. Provide
tubing, valves and other fittings required for pump calibration.
2.
3.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
F.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
b.
c.
Mid Level.
High Level.
H.
I.
2.
3.
J.
2.
3.
K.
A feed tank shall be provided to receive aged polymer solution from the
mix tank and store the solution prior to feeding to the point of
application.
The feed tank shall be designed to support the mix tank. The tank shall
be constructed of a minimum 11-gauge Type 304 stainless steel,
designed with an offset room the mix tank for accessibility. Tanks shall
be designed to meet local seismic codes as specified herein.
The tanks volume shall provide for not less than 840 gallons working
volume. The feed tank shall be provided with a 3-inch NPT discharge
connection.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
2.07
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
4.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
5.
C.
D.
2.
2.08
A commented hard copy printout and electronic copy of the custom PLC
ladder diagram and display configuration. The electronic copy of the
PLC program and display software shall be fully compatible with
Rockwell Software Logix 5000 and Panel Builder 32, respectively. The
software shall be fully annotated and commented to enable the user to
easily follow the PLC logic.
An operators manual describing the polymer feed system and the
procedures required by the operator to set up and run the polymer
system. Copies of all screens shall be included.
ELECTRICAL
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
Wiring:
1.
2.
The Drawings and Specification indicate the anticipated wiring for the
equipment provided under this Section. If additional wiring is required,
or if required wiring does not match what is indicated, the Contractor
shall make the necessary modifications to the electrical wiring and
documentation at Contractors sole expense. Wiring shall meet the
requirements of Section 26 05 05, Conductors, and the NEC. Insulation
shall be rated 600 volts, minimum. Low-voltage (24V) signals shall be
run in twisted, shielded pair cables.
All skid-mounted equipment shall be prewired to the local control
panels. Wiring shall conform with Section 26 05 05, Conductors.
C.
D.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
m.
4.
5.
6.
E.
2.09
PART 3
3.01
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.10
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
3.02
GENERAL
A.
3.03
FACTORY TESTING
A.
3.04
FIELD TESTING
A.
3.06
Each liquid polymer feed system shall be fully assembled and factory-tested
prior to shipment. Each unit shall arrive at the Job Site with a manufacturer's
certificate stating the date of factory testing and initials of the responsible
Quality Control Inspector.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.05
The polymer mix/feed system shall be factory assembled. The unit shall be
pre-wired and pre-piped requiring field connection of neat polymer and
solution outlet, as well as termination of 480-volt power supply to a junction
box mounted on the unit. Additional field terminations shall be made in the
junction box for the interface controls stated in this section.
MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.
2.
3.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
4.
5.
3.07
B.
C.
MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATES
A.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL
VOLUME 4
DRAWINGS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 6
DESIGN DETAILS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 7
ROTARY SCREEN THICKENER
EQUIPMENT PROCUREMENT
(BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 8
GEOTECHNICAL DATA REPORT
(BOUND SEPARATELY)